Samsung | SL-K4300LX | Samsung A3 흑백 디지털복합기 30ppm SL-K4300LX 사용자 매뉴얼

User’s Guide
Samsung Multifunction MultiXpress
X422x/X425x/X430x series
K425x/K430x/K435x series
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on Windows.
ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
1. Introduction
Key benefits
6
Features by model
8
Useful to know
10
About this user’s guide
11
Safety information
12
Machine overview
17
Control panel
20
Connecting a network cable
21
Turning on the machine
22
Understanding the LEDs
24
Display screen and useful menu
27
Understanding the pop-up keyboard
35
Installing the driver locally
36
Reinstalling the driver
39
Printing on special media
54
Tray Settings
59
3. Printing
Printer driver features
62
Basic printing
63
Opening printing preferences
65
Using special print features
72
Using Direct Printing Utility
80
Changing the default print settings
82
Setting your machine as a default machine
83
Print Settings in Machine
84
Setting Device Options
85
Printing to a file (PRN)
87
Mac printing
88
Linux printing
90
UNIX printing
91
2. Media and tray
Loading originals
42
Selecting print media
45
Loading paper in the tray
46
4. Copying
Understanding the copy screen
94
Basic copy
103
2
BASIC
Using the Quick Copy menu
104
Using the control panel
144
ID card copying
105
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
148
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
8. Management tools
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
108
Accessing management tools
157
Basic scan
116
SyncThru™ Web Service
158
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
117
Easy Capture Manager
165
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
118
Samsung AnyWeb Print
166
Mac scanning
119
Easy Eco Driver
167
Linux scanning
120
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
168
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
169
Using Samsung Printer Status
172
Using Samsung Printer Experience
174
Using Box
180
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
Preparing to fax
122
Using a fax in your computer
123
Understanding the fax screen
125
Sending a fax
133
Receiving a fax
136
7. Setting up an address book
Understanding the address screen
142
9. Troubleshooting
Redistributing toner
184
Replacing the toner cartridge
186
Replacing the waste toner container
189
Clearing original document jams
191
Tips for avoiding paper jams
197
3
BASIC
Clearing paper jams
198
Understanding display messages
212
Power and cable connecting problems
219
Solving other problems
220
10. Consumables and accessories
Ordering supplies and accessories
236
Available Consumables
237
Precautions
239
Available accessories
240
Available maintenance parts
242
Installing accessories
243
Checking replaceable’s lifespan
245
Using a USB Drive device
246
11. Appendix
Specifications
251
Regulatory information
261
Copyright
272
4
1. Introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes:
• Key benefits
6
• Features by model
8
• Useful to know
10
• About this user’s guide
11
• Safety information
12
• Machine overview
17
• Control panel
20
• Turning on the machine
22
• Connecting a network cable
21
• Understanding the LEDs
24
• Display screen and useful menu
27
• Understanding the pop-up keyboard
35
• Installing the driver locally
36
• Reinstalling the driver
39
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
- X425x series
▪ For single-side printing, up to 25 ppm (A4 or Letter).
- X422x series
▪ For single-side printing, up to 22 ppm (A4 or Letter).
• Fast, on-demand printing.
- K435x series
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco tab"
on page 69).
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using special print features" on page 72).
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
printing) (see "Using special print features" on page 72).
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
▪ For single-side printing, up to 35 ppm (A4 or Letter).
- K430x series
▪ For single-side printing, up to 30ppm (A4 or Letter).
- K425x series
▪ For single-side printing, up to 25 ppm (A4 or Letter).
Convenience
• We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
Fast high resolution printing
• You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 325).
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi.
• Fast, on-demand printing.
- X430x series
▪ For single-side printing, up to 30 ppm (A4 or Letter).
• Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
Manager" on page 165).
• Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 172 or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 169).
Key benefits
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 168).
Support XOA applications
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 166).
• Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
• If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
The machine supports XOA custom applications.
Wide range of functionality and application support
• Regarding the XOA custom applications, please contact your XOA custom
application provider.
• Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
“Confidential” (see "Watermark" on page 68).
• You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
page 257).
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
Features by model
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
Operating System
X430x series
X425x series
X422x series
K435x series
K430x series
K425x series
Windows
●
●
●
●
●
●
Mac
●
●
●
●
●
●
Linux
●
●
●
●
●
●
Unix
●
●
●
●
●
●
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive. For windows, select the printer driver and software
in the Select Software to Install window.
Software
X430x series
X425x series
X422x series
K435x series
K430x series
K425x series
PCL printer driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
PS printer drivera
●
●
●
●
●
●
XPS printer drivera
●
●
●
●
●
●
Direct Printing Utilitya
●
●
●
●
●
●
Features by model
Software
X430x series
X425x series
X422x series
K435x series
K430x series
K425x series
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung Printer Status
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung AnyWeb Printa
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung Easy Document Creator
●
●
●
●
●
●
Easy Capture Manager
●
●
●
●
●
●
SyncThru™ Web Service
●
●
●
●
●
●
SyncThru Admin Web Service
●
●
●
●
●
●
Easy Eco Driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
Samsung Easy Printer
Manager
Scan to PC
Settings
Fax to PC Settings
Device Settings
Fax
Samsung Network
PC Fax
●
●
●
●
●
●
Scan
Twain scan driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your
computer’s OS support the software.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Useful to know
The machine does not print.
A paper jam has occurred.
• Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 64).
• Open and close the door (see "Front view 1" on page 17).
• Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 36).
• Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
(see "Setting your machine as a default machine" on page 83).
• Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 198).
Printouts are blurry.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
• The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge (see "Redistributing toner" on page 184).
• Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
• Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 65).
• Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region
to view product service information.
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
• Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 186).
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
• Turn the product off and on again.
• Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the LEDs" on
page 24).
• You can get help, support application, machine drivers,
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads.
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
•
Do not discard this manual and keep it for future reference.
•
Read the safety information before using the machine.
•
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
•
2
General icons
Icon
Text
Caution
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
•
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
•
The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
•
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
Note
Description
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
Document is synonymous with original.
•
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
•
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
1. Introduction
11
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
4
Operating environment
Warning
3
Important safety symbols
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange
noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power
switch and unplug the machine.
• The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
1. Introduction
12
Safety information
5
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
Operating method
Caution
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
Burns could occur.
It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
1. Introduction
13
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safety. The machine could fall,
causing injury or machine damage.
Then lift the machine:
• If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
6
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the
operating temperature and humidity specification.
Otherwise, quality problems can occur and cause damage to the
machine.
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
• If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
heat, and humidity.
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a wellventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
see "Environmental specifications" on page 252
1. Introduction
14
Safety information
7
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Maintenance / Checking
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
The machine should be connected to the power level which is
specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You could get injured.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Children could get hurt.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
1. Introduction
15
Safety information
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
• Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.
• The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
For consumables that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste
toner bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
• When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for
disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
8
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not wash the supplies.
• For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user's carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
1. Introduction
16
Machine overview
9
Front view 1
3
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF) input tray
9
4
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF) output tray
10
5
Control panel
11 Front door
6
Multi-purpose tray
12 Paper output tray
2
1
Standard tray (tray 2)
Standard tray (tray 1)
3
4
12
5
11
10
9
6
7
8
1
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF) cover
7
2
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF) width guides
8
Power-switch
Power receptacle
1. Introduction
17
Machine overview
10
11
Front view 2
Inner view (X422x series/X425x series/X430x series)
2
3
3
1
4
2
4
1
5
1
Scanner glass
4
Multi-purpose tray
2
White sheet
5
USB port
3
Multi-purpose tray paper width guide
1
LSU window cleaning stick
3
Toner Cartridges
2
Waste toner container
4
Imaging units
If you want to see the imaging unit, you need to remove the waste toner
container.
1. Introduction
18
Machine overview
12
13
Inner view (K425x series/K430x series/K435x series)
Rear view
5
6
4
7
2
3
3
8
1
1
Waste toner container
2
Toner cartridge
3
1
2
Imaging unit
If you want to see the imaging unit, you need to remove the waste toner
container.
1
Output support tray
5
Network port
2
Control board cover
6
FDI (Optional) cover
3
USB port
7
Fax1 (Optional) port cover
4
USB printer port
8
Fax2 (Optional) port cover
1. Introduction
19
Control panel
14
When you use the display screen, use your finger only. The screen may be
damaged with a sharp pen or anything else.
Control Panel
2
3
1
4
1
Display screen
Shows the current machine status and prompts
during an operation. You can set menus easily
using the display screen.
2
Motion sensor hole
Motion sensor.
3
a. Power LED
Shows the power status of your machine.
b.
(Power /
Wakeup) button
4
Status LED
Turn the power on or off. When the blue LED is on,
the machine is powered on and you can use it. If
you turn the machine off, press this button for
more than two seconds. Then, confirmation
window appears.
Shows the status of your machine (see
"Understanding the LEDs" on page 24).
1. Introduction
20
Connecting a network cable
This machine has a bulit-in network interface card. You can connect your machine to a network using a network cable.
1. Introduction
21
Turning on the machine
Keep in mind that you should use the power cord supplied with the
machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage or fire to the machine.
1
2
Plug the other end into a properly grounded AC outlet.
Plug the power cord into the power receptacle.
1. Introduction
22
Turning on the machine
3
Turn on the main power switch.
• You can also turn the machine on pressing the
(Power / Wakeup)
• Some parts inside of the machine may be hot when power is on, or after
printing. Be careful not to burn yourself when working inside the
machine.
• Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on or plugged in.
Doing so may give you an electric shock.
1. Introduction
23
Understanding the LEDs
15
Understanding the status LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel" on page 20).
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Troubleshooting" on page 183).
• You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’ Samsung Printer Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 172).
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.
Status
Off
Description
• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode.
Blue
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking
Fax
The machine is sending or receiving faxes.
Copy
The machine is copying documents.
Scan
The machine is scanning documents.
Print
• When the status LED slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the status LED blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
1. Introduction
24
Understanding the LEDs
Status
Orange
On
Description
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge.
• A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 198).
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 46).
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 212).
• An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifeb. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge.
Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message (see "Understanding display
messages" on page 212). When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes its original task.
• The toner cartridge lifea or imaging unit is near the end of its life. Order a new toner cartridge or imaging unit. You can temporarily improve
print quality by redistributing the toner.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. When the imaging unit has reached its end of life, the machine will stop printing. In this case, you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru™Web Service (Settings > Machine
Settings > System > Setup > Supplies Management>Toner Cartridge Stop) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > System > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge Stop).
Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device’s system.
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Understanding display messages" on
page 212). If the problem persists, call for service.
1. Introduction
25
Understanding the LEDs
16
Understanding the power LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Status
Off
Blue
Description
The machine is off-line.
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking
The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any screen is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
Check the message on the display screen. Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Understanding display messages" on
page 212). If the problem persists, call for service.
1. Introduction
26
Display screen and useful menu
For example:
17
Menu navigation
You can tailor the machine’s range of functions to fit your needs with both
menus and widgets. Access features by scrolling through the available onscreen menus.
•
Swipe up or down on a home screen or menu to scroll it.
Panning
Touch and hold an icon, then tilt the device left or right.
For example:
Manual terms
•
Use panning to move icons from your home screens or application menus
to other pages.
Tap
Lightly touch the screen and release your finger. For example:
•
Tap the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or other text.
•
Tap a menu item to select it.
•
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and hold
Command Keys
•
(Back): Return to the previous screen, option or step.
•
(Home): Go to the main home screen.
•
(Recent): Show recently used apps.
•
Quick launch: A customizable key. See the next section for options.
Lightly touch and hold your finger to the screen For example:
•
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
•
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe
Lightly drag your finger across the screen.
1. Introduction
27
Display screen and useful menu
Add quick launch
1
From the display screen, tap the
Settings > Quick Launch.
2
Select the desired quick launch function.
3
•
None: The icon is not shown.
•
Screen Capture (
•
Applications (
•
Search (
Tap
(Settings) icon > Display > More
Depending on authentication settings, a machine’s users may need to enter
an ID and password. If this is enabled, the machine can only be used by a
user with an authorized ID and password on the machine. Contact the
machine’s administrator.
Navigating the Home Screens
): Capture the current screen to an image file.
): Open a screen showing all apps.
The machine initially has seven home screens. You can place application icons
on any page.
): Open the search screen.
(Back) to return to the settings menu.
From the main home screen, swipe left or right. The main home screen is
located in the center and three additional pages are located on each side.
18
Home Screen Overview
The main home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions.
You can customize it with application icons, shortcuts, and widgets to give you
instant access to information and applications. You can open the default page
at any time by tapping the
Navigating the application menus
By default, this machine has several application menus available in the main
home screen. If you want to access all application menus and widgets, tap the
icon and swipe the screen left or right.
icon . The screen images in this user guide may
differ from your machine depending on its options or model.
As you add applications, the number of application menus available to you
increases.
1. Introduction
28
Display screen and useful menu
Accessing recently-used apps
You can easily find any app that you used recently.
1
Tap the
icon from anywhere to open the recently-used
applications window.
2
Tap an application’s icon in this window to open it.
Adding a shortcut from the home screen
1
2
Tap the
Touch and hold the home screen to view a list of available shortcuts to
select from.
•
19
Customizing your home screen
You can customize your home screen to suit your needs.
Creating shortcuts
Shortcuts are different from widgets. While widgets can only launch
applications, shortcuts can do this and activate features and actions.
icon to go to the main home screen.
Set wallpaper
-
Home Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen.
-
Login Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen.
-
Home and Login Screens : Set the wallpaper for the Home and
Login Screens.
•
Apps, XOA Apps, Widgets and Programs : Place apps, XOA apps,
widgets, and program icons on home screen.
•
Folder : Create a folder on the home screen.
•
Page : Add another page to the home screen.
Adding a shortcut from the Apps menu
1
2
3
4
Tap the
icon to go to the main home screen.
Tap the
icon to view your current applications.
Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.
Touch and hold the application icon. This creates a shortcut to the
application and shows the main home screen.
1. Introduction
29
Display screen and useful menu
5
Drag the shortcut to a desired position on the screen and release it. To
move to a different page, drag the shortcut to the edge of the screen
until the screen scrolls to the desired page.
Deleting a shortcut
1
2
3
4
Scroll through the list and locate your desired widget.
5
Drag the widget to a desired position on the screen and release it. To
move the widget to a different page, drag it to the edge of the screen
until the screen scrolls to the desired page.
Touch and hold a shortcut until it becomes movable.
You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash, both items turn
red.
This action does not uninstall a program, it only removes the shortcut from
the home screen.
Removing a widget
1
2
Adding and removing widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside on your widgets tab and on
any page of the home screen. Unlike shortcuts, a widget appears as an on-screen
application.
Adding a widget
1
2
Tap the
icon to go to the main home screen.
Tap the
icon and tap the Widget tap at the top of the screen.
Touch and hold the widget icon. This creates a copy of the widget and
opens the main home screen.
Touch and hold a widget until it becomes movable.
You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash, both items turn
red.
This action does not uninstall a widget, it only removes the copy from the
home screen.
Moving icons in the Apps menu
1
2
3
Tap the
icon to go to the main home screen.
Tap the
icon to view your current applications.
Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected.
1. Introduction
30
Display screen and useful menu
4
Drag the icon to a desired position on the screen and release it. To move
to a different page, drag the icon to the edge of the screen until the
screen scrolls to the desired page.
4
Select a wallpaper and tap OK, Set wallpaper, or Cancel.
20
Notification Bar
Changing the Wallpaper
You can customize the Wallpaper (background) of your home screens.
1
From any home screen, touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
Then select Set wallpaper option.
2
Tap one of the following options in the window that appears.
3
•
Home Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen.
•
Login Screen : Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen. To use
thisfeature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see"Log-in"
on page 283).
•
Home and Login Screen : Set the wallpaper for both screens. To use
this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see"Log-in"
on page 283).
The notification bar includes a pull-down list to show information about
currently running processes, toner status, screen brightness, and recent
notifications.
Tap one of the following options in the next window that appears.
•
Gallery: Select a wallpaper from photographs and images in the
machine’s gallery.
•
Live wallpapers: Select an animated image.
•
Wallpapers: Select from several built-in stationary images.
On the home screen, touch and hold the notification bar until the pull-down
appears, then drag down to expand it.
1. Introduction
31
Display screen and useful menu
21
22
Job Status
When you tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps, the screen lists
Current Job, Completed Job, Secure Print, Secure Fax and Active Notice.
Counter
You can check how many pages/jobs were printed, copied, scanned, and faxedout. You can check the counter by device or users.
Tab Counter from the home screen or Apps.
Current Job
Displays a list of jobs in progress and pending.
Completed Job
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information tab
> Usage Counters (see "Counter" on page 32).
Displays a list of the completed jobs, including information about jobs in which
an error has occurred.
Secured Print / Fax
Displays a list of secured jobs. For secured print, You need to enter the ID and
Password set in the printer driver set in the printer (see "Print Mode" on page
70). For secured fax, you need to enter the Password.
Active Notice
Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred.
1. Introduction
32
Display screen and useful menu
Command keys
23
USB
Button
All
Name
Description
Quick Menu
Open the quick menu.
Search
Search for a desired menu or app.
Print
You can print a usage counter report.
My Program
Open a list of the apps you added.
-
Select the period of checking counter.
From, To
Set the period of checking counter.
Understanding the Counter menu
•
Total Usage: Each category shows the usage count by job types ( Print,
Copy, Fax Print, Report, Total ).
- All : Tap and select
•
Send Usage: Shows the count of Send ( Email, SMB, FTP, USB, PC, Others)
jobs.
•
Fax Send Usage(PSTN): Shows the count of Fax Send Usage.
•
User Usage (Login user only): Each category shows the printing usage by
user.
To use User Usage, you may need to select to Application Authentication
and Standard Accounting Only from Settings > Admin Settings >
Security > Mode or Method on the home screen or Apps.
To use the USB feature, tap Box > USB on the home screen or Apps (see "Using
a USB Drive device" on page 246).
To use this feature, you need to insert a USB memory device into the USB
port on your machine.
24
Help
Help provides online information to help with your machine questions.
The Help app provides information about the menus and functions available in
the machine. Use the pane on the left side of the screen to navigate the Help
app. You can also select the headings below each section to browse the help
topics.
1
Tap Help from the home screen or Apps.
The Help screen is displayed.
2
Select a topic and follow the built-in navigation.
Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and then
click on any option you want to know about.
1. Introduction
33
Display screen and useful menu
25
Button
My Page
The My Page app allows you to easily change your profile information and
settings. Your My Page profile stores your contact information as well as your
personal settings. You can use these settings to personalize the machine to suit
your usage habits and accessibility needs.
To use this feature, tap My Page on the home screen or Apps.
Name
Description
Search
Search for a desired menu or app.
My Program
Open a list of the apps you added.
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Open the sub menu.
Change
Password
Allows you to change the password.
Understanding the My Page menu
Allows you to modify various settings to make your experience using the
machine more enjoyable.
•
Personalization
-
•
Command keys
Button
Name
Quick Menu
Description
Open the quick menu.
Usage: The Frequency of Usage graph shows how many print, copy, fax,
send, or other jobs you have performed, while the quota information
indicates how close you are to your usage quotas.
Apps Settings
-
+Me Setting: The +Me setting setting specifies whether or not the
machine sends information about your usage to the Box or another
destination. You can also specify where your usage information is sent.
-
Send Feedback: The Send Feedback setting specifies whether or not
the machine sends information about your usage to the manufacturer.
Sending feedback helps the manufacturer improve the machine
through updates or patches.
1. Introduction
34
Understanding the pop-up keyboard
You can enter letters, numbers, or special symbols using the pop-up keyboard
on the display screen. This keyboard uses the standard QWERTY layout for ease
of use.
When you touch an input area, the keyboard pops up on the screen. The
keyboard initially shows lowercase letters.
•
Shift key(
): Tap this key to enter one upper-case letter. Tap this key
twice to toggle caps-lock.
•
Symbol/Numeric Mode(
and emoticons.
•
ABC Mode(
): Tap this key to return the keyboard layout to the
default letter keys. Use the Shift key (
and upper-case letters.
•
Space bar(
) to toggle between lower-case
): Tap this key to enter a space.
): Tap this key to enter numbers, symbols,
1. Introduction
35
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 315).
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
26
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
1. Introduction
36
Installing the driver locally
4
5
Select USB on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next.
3
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
27
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
•
4
5
6
7
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
1. Introduction
37
Installing the driver locally
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK ( or Install Software).
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
click Continue.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
12
After the installation is finished, click Close.
28
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
3
Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
4
5
6
Extract the package.
7
8
Proceed with installation.
9
10
11
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
Move to uld folder.
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
When installation finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
Click Add button.
Select your printer.
Click Forward button and add it to your system.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
1. Introduction
38
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
4
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 36).
29
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software.
•
For Windows 8,
1 From Charms, select Search > Apps.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
2 Search and click Control Panel.
3 Click Programs and Features.
4 Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
5 Follow the instructions in the window.
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
• If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, uninstall from the
desktop screen mode.
• If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
1. Introduction
39
Reinstalling the driver
30
31
Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
2
3
4
5
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software
Uninstaller.
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
Enter the password and click OK.
Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
2
3
Open Terminal program.
4
Proceed with uninstallation.
Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package.
Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root,
execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh")
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
1. Introduction
40
2. Media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Loading originals
42
• Selecting print media
45
• Loading paper in the tray
46
• Printing on special media
54
• Tray Settings
59
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass or the Dual scan document feeder (DSDF) to load
an original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
1
Open the DSDF.
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
1
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DSDF. If an original is detected in the DSDF,
the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass. To get the
best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images, use the scanner
glass.
Preparing originals
•
Do not load paper smaller than 25 x 25 mm (1.0 x 1.0 inch) or larger than 297
x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 inches).
•
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
2. Media and tray
42
Loading originals
3
Close the DSDF.
2
In the dual scan document feeder (DSDF)
• Leaving the DADF open while copying may affect copy quality and toner
consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean.
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the DSDF until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1 inch), start copying with the lid open.
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
Preparing originals
•
Do not load paper smaller than 140 x 140 mm (5.5 x 5.5 inches) or larger than
297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 inches).
•
The DSDF can automatically detect A3, A4 LEF, A4 SEF, B4, B5 LEF, B5 SEF, A5
LEF, A5 SEF, Ledger, Legal, Letter LEF, Letter SEF, Statement LEF, and
Statement SEF-sized originals.
•
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper, in order to prevent
paper jams, low print quality, and machine damage.
• Do not put hands on the scanner glass while closing the DSDF. The DSDF
may fall on your hands and cause injury.
• Do not look at the light inside of the scanner while copying or scanning.
It is harmful to eyes.
-
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
-
Coated paper
-
Onion skin or thin paper
-
Wrinkled or creased paper
-
Curled or rolled paper
-
Torn paper
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
•
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
2. Media and tray
43
Loading originals
•
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
3
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
Using the DSDF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (80 g/m2, 20 lb bond) for
one job.
1
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
2
Load the originals face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of
the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
tray.
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always keep
the glass clean.
2. Media and tray
44
Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels,
and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use
with your machine.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user’s guide and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets
characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled.
3
Guidelines to select print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may
cause the following problems:
•
Poor print quality
•
Increased paper jams
•
Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality.
When you choose print materials, consider the following:
•
The type, size, and weight of the print media for your machine are described
in print media specifications (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
•
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
•
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper,
more vibrant images.
•
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp
the printing looks on the paper.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets
the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media
type used (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
• Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
• Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used
(see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
2. Media and tray
45
Loading paper in the tray
4
Standard tray / optional dual cassette feeder
1
Squeeze the lock lever on the handle and pull out the tray.
2
Squeeze the paper length guide, and pull it to the end of the tray.
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into the standard
tray. The standard tray can hold a maximum of 1,040 sheets of plain paper.
You can purchase an optional dual cassette feeder and attach it below the
standard tray to load an additional 1,040 sheets of plain paper.
• Standard tray contains two trays. (Tray 1, Tray 2)
• Optional dual cassette feeder contains two trays. (Tray 3, Tray 4)
• The process to load paper in tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4 is the same.
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems, that
require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service
agreements.
2. Media and tray
46
Loading paper in the tray
1
2
1 Paper length guide
3
Squeeze the paper width guide, and pull it to the end of the tray.
1 Paper width guide
4
Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
2. Media and tray
47
Loading paper in the tray
5
Load paper with the print side facing up.
6
Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length.
2. Media and tray
48
Loading paper in the tray
7
After loading paper into the tray, pinch the paper width guide and move
it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack.
Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper: the guide
may bend the paper.
Do not overload the tray: it may cause paper jams. Make sure that the paper
is below the maximum paper capacity guide inside the tray.
1
• Do not push the paper guide too far causing the media to warp.
1 Paper capacity guide
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
8
Fix the the paper length guide using the locking switch. Release the
locking switch to load a different sized paper.
2. Media and tray
49
Loading paper in the tray
9
Insert the tray back into the machine.
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel (see "Tray Settings" on page 59).
The standard tray and optional dual cassette feeder can automatically
detect various-sized paper (see "Media sizes automatically detected" on
page 53).
If you set the Tray Confirmation Message ON in Tray Settings, the
confirmation window appears automatically.
Check if the paper size and type in the tray are detected or not. If you
want to set the paper size and type or if the machine cannot detect them,
you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window.
1 Locking switch
• If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper
meets the media specifications (see "Print media specifications" on page
254). Then, try placing one sheet at a time in the multi-purpose tray (see
"Multi-purpose tray" on page 51).
• The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the
control panel.
To print from an application:
a Open an application and start the print menu.
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 65).
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an
appropriate paper type, size, and source.
2. Media and tray
50
Loading paper in the tray
d Press OK.
e Start printing from an application.
1
Open the multi-purpose tray and pull out the extention if necessary.
2
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
5
Multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as
postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on
colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
•
Load only one type, size, and weight of print media at a time in the multipurpose tray.
•
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print
media.
•
Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the
multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
•
Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print
quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
•
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose tray.
2. Media and tray
51
Loading paper in the tray
3
Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.
4
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to
the width of the paper. Do not force too much, otherwise the paper will
bend resulting in a paper jam or skew.
5
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multipurpose tray (see "Media sizes automatically detected" on page 53).
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel (see "Tray Settings" on page 59).
2. Media and tray
52
Loading paper in the tray
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the
control panel.
To print from an application:
a Open an application, and start the print menu.
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 65).
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate
paper type, size, and source.
d Press OK.
e Start printing from an application.
6
Media sizes automatically detected
sizea
(Plain)
Standard
tray1,2
Optional dual
cassette feeder
Multipurpose tray
Duplex
printing
Statement SEF
●
●
●
●
A3 SEF
●
●
●
●
(Tray2 only)
A4 SEF
●
●
●
●
A4 LEF
●
●
●
●
A5 SEF
●
●
●
●
B4 SEF
●
●
●
●
JIS B5 SEF
●
●
●
●
JIS B5 LEF
●
●
A6 SEF
●
ISO B5 SEF
This machine can automatically detect various sized-paper. Refer to the table
below.
sizea
(Plain)
●
A5 LEF
●
●
●
●
ISO B5 LEF
Folio SEF
●
●
●
●
Oficio SEF
●
●
●
●
8K SEF
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Standard
tray1,2
Optional dual
cassette feeder
Multipurpose tray
Duplex
printing
Letter SEFb
●
●
●
●
16K SEF
Letter LEFc
●
●
●
●
16K LEF
●
Ledger
●
●
●
●
PostCard 4x6
●
(Tray2 only)
Legal SEF
●
●
●
●
Executive SEF
●
●
●
●
●
●
Executive LEF
●
(Tray2 only)
●
a. This machine can detect paper of similar sizes as the listed paper sizes.
b. SEF meaning is Short Edge Feed.
c. LEF meaning is Long Edge Feed.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
2. Media and tray
53
Printing on special media
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.
Standard tray/
optional dual cassette
feeder
Multi-purpose tray
Punched
●
●
Thin Cardstock
●
●
Thin Glossy
●
●
Types
(A4)
When using special media, we recommend you feed one piece of paper at a
time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray (see "Print
media specifications" on page 254).
Standard tray/
optional dual cassette
feeder
Multi-purpose tray
Plain
●
●
Thick
●
●
Heavy weight
●
●
Extra Heavy weight 1
●
Thin
●
●
Cotton
●
●
Color
●
●
Preprinted
●
●
Recycled
●
●
Bond
●
●
Archive
●
●
Letterhead
●
●
Types
(A4)
Envelope
●
Labels
●
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type
option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This
setting appears in the list so that you can select it. This will let you get the
best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
2. Media and tray
54
Printing on special media
-
7
Envelope
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it with the flap side up.
Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the machine during operation.
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
•
Do not use stamped envelopes.
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, selfadhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
•
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
•
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
•
•
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature of about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
-
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2
(16 lb) otherwise, a jam may occur.
•
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6
inches) from the edges of the envelope.
-
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than
6 mm (0.25 inches) curl, and should not contain air.
•
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
-
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or damaged.
2. Media and tray
55
Printing on special media
8
-
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5
inches) of curl in any direction.
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
Labels
Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
machines.
•
•
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
•
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
•
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or damaged.
•
Do not load paper that does not have space between labels running the
same direction as the paper is being fed. Otherwise, it could cause paper
jams.
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s
fusing temperature of about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second.
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
2. Media and tray
56
Printing on special media
9
10
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
Tray
Standard tray/
Single-sided
double-sided
Face up
Face down
Face down
Face up
Optional dual cassette
feeder
Multi-purpose tray
•
Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.8 inches) wide or 148 mm (5.8
inches) long.
•
In the software application, set margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away
from the edges of the material.
•
Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt,
vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s
fusing temperature of about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second.
•
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
•
Forms should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes
during storage.
•
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
2. Media and tray
57
Printing on special media
11
Glossy
Load a single sheet of paper into the multi-purpose tray at a time, glossy
side facing down.
•
Recommend media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure
Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.
•
Recommend media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior
Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A) only.
2. Media and tray
58
Tray Settings
-
To change detailed tray settings, tap Settings > Tray Settings and select the
tray and options you want on the display screen.
•
If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper,
press the cardinal point arrows to set the paper size. You can also set and
save the custom size using Custom Size. You can select the custom size
whenever you need it.
Paper Type: Allows you to change the paper type.
12
Options
Scroll through the options by swiping up and down.
•
Tray 1, MP Tray : You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
•
Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 : You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
If the optional three Second Cassette Feeder are installed, you can use this
functions.
•
•
Auto Tray Switch: Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For example, if both tray
1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper, the machine automatically
prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
•
Auto Continue: This option allows you to continue printing when the paper
size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray. When this option
is activated, the machine continues printing using similar or large size paper.
If this option is inactivated, the machine waits until the required size paper
is loaded in the tray.
•
Paper Substitution: When the requested paper for a print job is not
available in the tray, this feature allows you to substitute similar paper size,
For example, if the requested letter sized paper is not available in the tray,
this machine substitutes A4 for the requested paper.
Paper Size: Allows you to change the paper size.
-
You can change the paper list on the display screen. The paper lists are
divided into the available A/B type and letter type paper in this machine.
When the paper is substituted, some image loss may occur.
2. Media and tray
59
Tray Settings
•
Tray Confirmation Message: When you load paper into a tray, you can set
the confirmation message to appear automatically. This machine can detect
some paper sizes and types automatically. If you want to set the paper size
and type, or the machine cannot detect them, you can set the size and type
directly in the confirmation window.
•
Tray Protection: If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is excluded
during tray switching.
This setting works for copy or print jobs: It doesn't affect fax jobs.
•
Tray Priority Settings: You can set the tray priority. If first setting is tray 1,
the machine automatically prints from tray 1 after the second setting tray
runs out of paper.
2. Media and tray
60
3. Printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
• Basic printing
63
• Opening printing preferences
65
• Setting Device Options
85
• Using special print features
72
• Using Direct Printing Utility
80
• Changing the default print settings
82
• Setting your machine as a default machine
83
• Print Settings in Machine
84
• Setting Device Options
85
• Printing to a file (PRN)
87
• Mac printing
88
• Linux printing
90
• UNIX printing
91
Printer driver features
PCL/PSa b/
• The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
• Check the operating systems that are compatible with your machine (see
"System requirements" on page 257).
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
•
Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
•
Number of copies
You can also use various special printing features. The following table shows a
general overview of features supported by your printer drivers:
Feature
XPS
PSb
bc
Windows
Mac
Linux
Unix
Fit to page printing
●
●
Reduce and enlarge
printing
●
●
Different source for
first page
●
●
Cover page options
●
●
●
●
Raster compression
●
●
●
●
●
(PCL only)
Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in
the following table.
●
●
Watermark
●
●
Overlay
●
(PCL only)
PCL/PSa b/
Feature
Output options
PS
XPSbc
b
Windows
Mac
Linux
Unix
Machine quality
option
●
●
●
●
Poster printing
●
●
Multiple pages per
sheet
●
●
●
●
Booklet printing
●
Double-sided
printing (duplex)
●
●
a. The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript-based
applications such as Acrobat Reader®, Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe Photoshop®, etc.
b. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your
computer’s OS support the software.
c. XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher.
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
3. Printing
62
Basic printing
• Mac printing (see "Mac printing" on page 88).
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
• Linux printing (see "Linux printing" on page 90).
• UNIX printing (see "UNIX printing" on page 91).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7. Your
Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system
or the application you are using.
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to
change the print setting (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
4
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
3. Printing
63
Basic printing
1
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon (
in the Windows task bar.
•
You can cancel the print job with the Cancel Print from the computers’
Samsung Printer Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer
Status" on page 172).
)
3. Printing
64
Opening printing preferences
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning
mark,
, or
. An exclamation mark (
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
) means you can select that
certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu.
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
Click Properties or Preferences.
• You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 167).
• You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 172).
3. Printing
65
Opening printing preferences
Orientation
2
Favorites tab
Listed items help you choose pre-defined settings.
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on
a page.
Layout Options
This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document.
•
Single Page Per Side: This option is a basic layout option. This option allows
you to print a page on one side of a paper.
•
Multiple Pages Per Side: See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 72.
•
Poster Printing: See "Printing posters" on page 72.
•
Booklet Printing: See "Printing booklets" on page 73.
•
Page Border: This option allows you to print your document on which
border line is. This option is not available for Poster Printing and Booklet
Printing.
Double-Sided Printing
3
Basic tab
This option allows you to print on both sides of paper (see "Printing on both
sides of the paper" on page 74).
Basic tab to set various printing options.
3. Printing
66
Opening printing preferences
4
•
Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray.
This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality
may not be achieved.
•
Speical Page: This option is allows you to make special pages such as
covers. You can add, delete or update the special page settings to the list.
This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
Paper tab
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Copies
5
This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed. You can
select 1 to 9999 copies.
Paper Options
Graphics tab
Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing
needs.
•
Original Size: This option allows you to set the actual paper size of the
originals.
Quality
•
Output Size: This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected
paper size regardless of the originals size (see "Fitting your document to a
selected paper size" on page 75).
The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics.
The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document.
-
•
Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s
contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a
percentage you want (see "Change the size by percentage of your
document" on page 75).
Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray. Use
MP Tray when printing on special materials, such as envelopes and
transparencies.
Font/Text
Select Clear Text to print text darker than on a normal document.
Check All Text Black to print in solid black, regardless of the color it appears on
the screen.
3. Printing
67
Opening printing preferences
Graphic Controller
Output options
It allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving
readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode.
•
Print Order: This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages
will print. Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages are available only when you
use the PCL printer driver.
Toner Save
•
Skip Blank Pages: This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages
in the original data.
The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing toner when printing a
draft version of a document. Select Off to print in normal mode and select On to
print with less toner applied to the page.
•
Manual Margin: This option allows you to specify binding margin. Binding
margin adjusts binding position. This option is not available when you use the
PS printer driver.
6
Advanced tab
If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option returns to the default
setting.
Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options.
Security
Watermark
See "Using watermarks" on page 76.
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects
the printing information to prevent your data from being comprised on your
network. Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the hard drive is
installed. The hard drive is used to decrypt the printing data.
Overlay
See "Using overlay" on page 78.
3. Printing
68
Opening printing preferences
Job Accounting
Eco Options
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
•
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the
setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine.
•
None: Disables this option.
•
Eco Printing: Eco mode gets activated. Select Double-Sided Printing,
Layout, and Skip Blank Pages you want to use in eco mode. As long as you
do not change the options from the other tabs, the document will be print
out as set in the eco mode.
•
Passcode: If the administrator sets On-Forced in Default Eco Mode for this
machine, the eco mode is always set by this machine’s eco setting, while the
Eco Options in the printer driver is disabled. If you need to change the print
settings, click Password and enter the password or contact your
administrator.
•
•
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission
can start a print job.
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group
permission can start a print job.
• Click the question mark(
) from the upper-right corner of the window
and click on any option you want to know about.
• Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in
the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service. For the detailed
information about them (see "SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 158).
7
Eco tab
The Eco tab allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly
printing. When you select Eco Printing, you can see the eco image (
) on
some options. Also, some options are not available to use in the eco mode.
Result Simulator
Result Simulator shows the result of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
3. Printing
69
Opening printing preferences
9
• The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco mode is
disabled.
Print Mode
• Referred to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy and paper from
IEA(International Energy Agency), the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs
and Communication of Japan and www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each
model has a different index.
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using
the HDD in your machine. The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without storing the printing file on the HDD. You can also use this
option in other tabs.
• The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption in this machine.
•
Normal: This mode prints without storing your document.
• The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the
operating system used, computing performance, application software,
connection method, media type, media size, job complexity, etc.
•
Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can
print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
•
Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You
need to enter a password to print it (see "Job Status" on page 32).
•
Store: This mode is used only for storing documents on the HDD. If
necessary, you can load and print the stored documents. You can find the
stored file in the Box (see "Using Box" on page 180). First, choose a
document box in Save Location and then set Options.
•
Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing documents at
the same time. If necessary, you can load and print the stored documents.
You can find the stored file in the Box (see "Using Box" on page 180). First,
choose a document box in Save Location and then set Options.
•
Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If
you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the mass
storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue,
decreasing the computer’s work load.
•
Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
8
Samsung tab
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the
driver. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can have access to
services.
3. Printing
70
Opening printing preferences
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using
the control panel.
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
3
4
5
Click Save.
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
• User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the
control panel. The user name automatically appears as the user name
that you use to log on Windows.
• Enter Password: If the Property of the stored documents you selected
is Secured, you have to enter the password for the stored document.
This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
• Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
10
Using a favorite setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Favorites tab and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for
future use.
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.To delete saved
settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
11
Using help
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
3. Printing
71
Using special print features
Special print features include:
•
"Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 72.
•
"Printing posters" on page 72.
•
"Printing booklets" on page 73.
•
"Printing on both sides of the paper" on page 74.
•
"Change the size by percentage of your document" on page 75.
•
"Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 75.
•
"Using watermarks" on page 76.
•
"Using overlay" on page 78.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type dropdown list.
3
4
Select Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet.
5
6
7
12
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)
in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
13
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print
more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in
the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets
of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size
document.
3. Printing
72
Using special print features
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
3
Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
Select the page layout you want.
14
Printing booklets
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the
pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
Specification of the page layout:
8
4
9
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters
or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to
make it easier to paste the sheets together.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, JIS B5,
Statement, Executive, A5, Ledger, or JIS B4 sized print media.
5
6
7
Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access the
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down
list.
3
4
Click the Advanced button. Then select the option you want.
You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
3. Printing
73
Using special print features
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to
find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper
size in the Original size option on the Paper tab.
3
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically
canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without
or mark).
5
From the Double-Sided Printing section, select the binding option you
want.
•
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined
by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the machine. This
option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
•
None: Disables this feature.
•
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
•
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
•
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the
print order when duplex printing.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
15
Printing on both sides of the paper
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you
want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with Letter, Legal,
Oficio, US Folio, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Statement, Executive, A5, 8K, 16K, Ledger,
Tabloid Extra, or JIS B4 sized paper.
Do not print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or
thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or
damage the machine.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
Click the Basic tab.
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the Original size, Source, and Type.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
3. Printing
74
Using special print features
16
17
Change the size by percentage of your document
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the
printed page by typing in a percentage you want.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
3
4
Click the Paper tab.
Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size.
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
You cannot use this feature when you select a size of paper from the Output
Size.
5
6
Select the Source and Type.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size
regardless of the document size. This option can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
3
4
5
6
Click the Paper tab.
Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size.
Select the size of paper to be printed in the tray from the Output Size.
Select the Source and Type.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
3. Printing
75
Using special print features
Using an existing watermark
18
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text or image over an existing
document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page
or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can
be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
• Header: You can add the selected text to the Top left, Top center, or Top
right.
• Footer: You can add the selected text to the Bottom left, Bottom center,
or Bottom right.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the
Triple Cassette Feeder image.
3
Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
• Watermark Message: Allows users to enter the watermark which is the
user want to print.
• Image file: Allows users to load the watermark image which is the user
want to print.
• Watermark name: Allows users to enter the watermark name for adding
to watermark drop-down list.
• First Page Only: Prints watermark only on the first page. Not checked by
default.
3. Printing
76
Using special print features
Creating a watermark
Editing a watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
2
From the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
list.
2
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
list.
3
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up
to 256 characters.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list
and change the watermark message and options.
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the
first page only.
4
Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the
Watermark Alignment and Angle section.
5
6
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a watermark
Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
When you finish editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print
window.
2
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down
list.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks
list and click Delete.
4
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down
list.
3. Printing
77
Using special print features
19
Using overlay
This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.
What is an overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored on the computer hard drive (HDD) as a
special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used
to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead,
you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is
currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead,
you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print
the letterhead overlay on your document.
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new
page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear
when printed as an overlay.
2
To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
3
Click the Advanced tab, and select Create from the Overlay drop-down
list.
4
In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File
name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
C:\Formover).
5
6
Click Save.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
7
Creating a new page overlay
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk
drive.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print
with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo
or image.
3. Printing
78
Using special print features
Using a page overlay
7
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document.
To print an overlay with a document:
1
2
3
4
5
Create or open the document you want to print.
To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
Deleting a page overlay
Click the Advanced tab.
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop-down list.
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay File 1 or
Overlay File 2 drop-down list, select Load from the Overlay List. Select
the overlay file you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source,
you can also load the file when you access the Load window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List
box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List
box.
6
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the
document you will print with the overlay.
If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this
box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an
overlay on your document.
1
2
3
In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
Select Print Overlay from the Overlay drop down list.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay List, select
Load from the Overlay List. Select the overlay file you want to delete.
4
5
6
Click Delete.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay
automatically prints with your document.
3. Printing
79
Using Direct Printing Utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without
open the files.
• HDD should be installed on your machine, to print PDF files using this
program.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print. Deactivate the
printing restriction feature, and retry printing.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
21
Printing
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
From the Direct Printing Utility window
1
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1.7 and
below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
•
For Windows8, from Charms, Select Search > Apps.
2
3
Find Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility.
4
Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open.
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
20
What is Direct Printing Utility?
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine
to print without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows
spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.
To install this program:
5
6
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
3. Printing
80
Using Direct Printing Utility
22
Using the right-click menu
1
Right-click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
2
3
4
Select the machine you wish to use.
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
3. Printing
81
Changing the default print settings
Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer
driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first,
and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
3
4
5
6
Change the settings on each tab.
Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Right-click on your machine.
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences has a ►, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
3. Printing
82
Setting your machine as a default machine
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
3
4
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Select your machine.
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
►, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
3. Printing
83
Print Settings in Machine
You can set print related settings. When there is no specific input for printing
options, the machine prints with the settings you set here. Set the frequently
used printing settings. This feature can be useful if your company has a specific
printing form.
Tab Settings > Print Settings from the display screen.
23
General
•
General: You can set Skip Blank Page, Paper Source and Emulation.
-
Skip Blank Pages: You can skip the blank pages during printing.
-
Paper Source: You can select the tray as a paper source.
-
Emulation: You can choose the emulation format.
24
Layout
•
Layout: Provides paper layout related options.
-
Orientation: Select the paper orientation.
-
Duplex: Select the paper orientation for duplex mode.
-
Number of Copies: Select the number of copies you want to print.
-
Margin: Adjust the margin for Common Duplex, Common Simplex and
Emulation.
3. Printing
84
Setting Device Options
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
1
3
4
Select Device Options.
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
5
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
6
Select the appropriate option.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
•
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
•
For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
•
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
•
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
•
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
•
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
Right-click your machine.
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context
menus, select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
-
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
-
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
3. Printing
85
Setting Device Options
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
•
7
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
3. Printing
86
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
To create a file:
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
2
3
Click Print.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example c:\Temp\file name.
3. Printing
87
Mac printing
26
Changing printer settings
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.
This section explains how to print using a Mac.
25
Printing a document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver setting in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4
5
6
Open the File menu and click Print.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Click Print.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
27
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
2
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
3
4
Select the other options to use.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
Click Print.
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
3. Printing
88
Mac printing
28
29
Printing on both sides of paper
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode,
decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding
options are, as follows:
•
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
1
2
3
4
5
Using help
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
Select a binding orientation from Two-Sided option.
Select the other options to use.
Click Print and; the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
3. Printing
89
Linux printing
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lp or lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
30
31
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
Printing files
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS,
directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows you to
do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
1
2
Open the document to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Page Setup in some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make sure that your machine
isselected. Click Apply.
4
5
6
7
8
Open the File menu and click Print.
Select your machine to print.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
Click Print.
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
32
Configuring printer properties
You can change the default printing options or connection type with a printing
utility supplied by O/S.
1
Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing
menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal
program).
2
3
4
Select your printer and double-click it.
Change default printing options or connection type.
Click Apply button.
3. Printing
90
UNIX printing
34
Changing the machine settings
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
33
Proceeding the print job
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
and “C” for Cancel.
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print.
General tab
1
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
For example, if you are printing “document1”
printui document1
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
2
3
4
•
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
•
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
•
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Selection.
•
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
•
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
Select a printer that has been already added.
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
5
Press OK to start the print job.
•
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
3. Printing
91
UNIX printing
•
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
•
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
•
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
Printer-specific settings tab
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
3. Printing
92
4. Copying
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
This chapter includes:
• Understanding the copy screen
94
• Basic copy
103
• Using the Quick Copy menu
104
• ID card copying
105
Understanding the copy screen
When you tap Copy from the home screen or Apps , the Copy screen appears.
This screen has several tabs and many copying options. All the options are
grouped by feature so you can configure your selections easily. If want to go
home, tap the home(
Virtual Hard Key
• Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen.
) button.
• When an app is launched for the first time, the virtual hard keys are
shown.
(Help) app explains the normal and usual procedure for copying
originals. Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu)
• If the screen is touched, the virtual hard keys always appear.
• If the
,
touched, the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown.
and then click on any option you want to know about.
Button
1
Command keys
Button
Name
Description
Reset
Reset the current machine’s configuration.
Interrupt
Suspend the current job, allowing for urgent copying.
Stop
Stop a job at any time. A pop-up window appears to
show the jobs that you can stop.
Start
Start a job.
Description
Quick Menu
Open the quick menus.
Search
Search for a desired menu or app.
My Program
Add an app to My Program List.
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Open the sub menu.
,
Name
Set the number of copies printed.
4. Copying
94
Understanding the copy screen
2
Button
Copy tab
Name
Description
Preview for
play
Scans for job.
Preview edit
mode
This button appears to edit when scanning.
Adjust the prescanned image with operation
functions such as rotate and crop.
Some features are not available to
preview edit mode.
Start
Starts a job.
Changing Darkness
You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the darkness level using
the control bar. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
images darker.
Preview
Display the originals type.
Tap Darkness (
Button
Name
) to show the slider control.
Description
Setting
History
View changed options list.
Preview for
status
Shows the job preview.
4. Copying
95
Understanding the copy screen
Selecting the type of originals
•
Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the
appropriate document type for a copy job.
ID Copy: Allows you to copy both sides of a two-sided original onto one
sheet of paper. This feature is helpful for copying originals with important
information on both sides, such as driver's licenses.
•
Save to Box: Allows you to save scanned originals to the hard disk drive in
the machine. You can then print these saved documents at a later date or
store them as printable files. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to
save a document to the hard disk drive in the machine.
•
Save as Default: Allows you to save the current copy options as the default
copy settings. After you save the default copy settings, all future copy tasks
use these settings. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the
current settings as the default settings.
•
Restore Default: Allows you to restore the copy settings to the default
settings of the machine. This option changes the current copy settings to
the original copy settings configured at the factory. Tap the Restore Default
option in this menu to restore the default settings.
•
Copy Settings: The Another Page Confirmation option specifies whether
the machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after
each page. Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single
copy job.
•
Text : Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo : Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo : Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
Sub menu (Action overflow)
•
Add to My Program: Add an app to my program list.
•
Eco: When Eco mode is enabled, you can select only economical printing
settings. Tap the Eco option in the Action Overflow menu to turn Eco mode
on or off.
•
•
Build Job: This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in
the current job. If you select No, then the scanning process is completed and
the remainder of the job is performed.
Proof Copy: Allows you to print a test copy to check the quality and
alignment of the printout. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to
print a proof copy. After ensuring that the copy is perfect, tap the Start
button to print the rest of the copies.
• Another Page Confirmation: This option specifies whether the
machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each
page. Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy
job.
4. Copying
96
Understanding the copy screen
•
UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Copy
menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus.
You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or
tap Clear All to remove all the menus.
• You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option
(Send >
Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration).
• Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.
Job progress
Paper Source
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
•
Detail : Tap this button to see the status, type, and time of the job.
•
Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied.
The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
the orientation and size of the printout.
•
Send Feedback : Allows you to send feedback about the current send job.
If you want to receive sending job by email, you can set from My page app
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 34).
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
on page 283).
Setting options
The Copy tab provides two sections. The More tab provides four additional
sections.
The paper source option sets the tray for this print job. The machine prints the
scanned image on the paper in the selected tray. You can see icons that
represent paper sizes and the amount of paper remaining in each tray.
Duplex
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper.
You can select the Original and Output binding type, either type is Book or
Calendar.
•
1 Sided: For originals or output binding type that are printed on one side
only.
•
2 Sided, Book: For originals or output binding type that are printed on both
sides.
•
2 Sided, Calendar : For originals or output binding type that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
4. Copying
97
Understanding the copy screen
Reduce/Enlarge
The reduce/enlarge feature allows you print an image larger or smaller than the
original. Tap the icons on the screen to reduce a copy by 25 % to 99 %, or enlarge
a copy by 101 % to 400 %.
•
Auto: Reduces or enlarges the copy based on the size of the output paper.
•
100%(Original): Prints the copy at the same size as the original.
•
Custom: You can set custom percentage(between 25 to 400%).
•
XY Custom: You can set XY custom values(between 25 to 400%).
Original Size
Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
•
Auto: Automatically detect the size of original (see "Media sizes
automatically detected" on page 53).
•
Mixed Size: If the original uses a combination of both Letter and Legal-size
paper, the machine can use the proper-sized paper for each sheet from
multiple trays. For example, if the original is 3 pages, two Letter and one
Legal, the machine prints in order on the correct paper size for each page.
•
Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper,
use the arrows to set the required size.
Finishing
Original Orientation
You can set the print output options.
Sets the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3
page original, one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second
complete document.
Use this option to set the orientation of the original.
•
Upright Images: Use this setting for an original document loaded with the
top toward the back of the machine.
•
Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
•
•
Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
Sideways Images: Use this setting for an original document loaded into the
DSDF with the top of the document toward the left side of the machine, or
an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the
document toward the right side of the machine.
4. Copying
98
Understanding the copy screen
Booklet
Original type
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document
type for the current job.
•
Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are
then folded to produce a booklet with all pages in the correct sequence. The
machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on
the selected paper.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
1 Sided Originals: Copy one side of the original to one sheet of a booklet.
•
2 Sided Originals, Book: Copy each side of an original to one sheet of a
booklet.
•
2 Sided Originals, Calendar: Copy each side of an original to one page of a
booklet. The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text
will be upright in the booklet.
N-up
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 -16 pages onto one sheet of
paper.
When you use the N-Up feature, the ID Copy, Image Repeat, Booklet,
Book Copy, Image Shift, and Poster Copy menus are disabled.
•
Off: Disable this feature.
•
N-Up: Copies the specified number of pages from the original onto one
sheet of paper.
•
Orientation: You can select the direction in which information is copied on
a page.
You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce/Enlarge for the N-Up
feature.
Book Copy
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the RADF until its
hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the RADF. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the RADF open.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Left Page: Prints only the left page of the book.
4. Copying
99
Understanding the copy screen
•
Right Page: Prints only the right page of the book.
•
Both Pages(From Left): Prints both facing pages from the left page.
•
Both Pages(From Right): Prints both facing pages from a right page.
•
Book Center & Edge Erase: Erases shadows caused by bindings or book
edges from the center and side edges of copies.
•
When you use the Image Repeat feature, the ID Copy, N-up, Booklet,
Book Copy, Image Shift, and Poster Copy menus are disabled.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Auto Repeat: The number of images is automatically determined by the
original image and paper size. The number of repeating images is
automatically selected based on size of the original, the size of output page,
and the reduce/enlarge percentage by up to 100 %.
•
Manual Repeat: Manually select the number of images from 2, 4, 6, 8, 9 or
16.
Duplex: You can using duplex function and setting them.
Poster Copy
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets
of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size
document.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
Image Repeat
This option prints several copies of the original image on the same side of a
single page. If you have other original in the DADF, all other original images get
printed the same way.
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For
example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “Draft” or
“Confidential” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a
document.
Stamp
You cannot apply stamps to booklets or posters.
4. Copying
100
Understanding the copy screen
Prints the IP Address, ID, Device Information, Comment, Page Number or
Date & Time on printouts. You can set the Text Size, Opacity or Position of the
stamp.
Overlay
An overlay is text and/or images stored on a computer hard drive (HDD) in a
special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays can take the
place of traditional letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead,
you can create an overlay matching the layout of the letterhead. To print a letter
on your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead in
the machine, just enable the letterhead overlay on your document.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
+ New: Create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
•
Overlap: Select an overlap location.
Erase Edge
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Border Erase: Erase an equal amount of edges from all copies.
•
Hole Punch Erase: Erase hole-punch marks from the left edge of copies.
Image Shift
To prevent images from overlapping with staples, and other marks, you can
move an image’s position.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Auto Center: Automatically position at the center of the paper.
•
Custom Shift: Adjust the margins of the paper as needed.
Covers
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main
body of the job.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Front: Print the document with a front cover.
•
Back: Print the document with a back cover.
•
Front & Back: Prints the document with a front and back cover.
•
Cover Sheet: Sets the option for double-sided copying.
•
Paper Source: Selects the default paper tray to use.
Image Adjustment
This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness, Sharpness,
Contrast and Negative Image.
4. Copying
101
Understanding the copy screen
Background Adjustment
This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
background, such as newspapers or catalogs. You can use the options in this
menu to make the copies easier to read.
•
Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background
in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
•
Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
your scanned output is clearly legible.
Mirror Image
This option allows you to reverse the original document like a mirror.
4. Copying
102
Basic copy
This is the usual procedure to copy your original documents.
1
2
Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps.
3
4
Adjust the settings on the Copy tab and More tab.
5
Tap
copying.
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad (or +, button) on the control panel, if necessary.
,
(Start ) from the control panel to begin
To cancel the current copy job, tap
(Stop) > tap Job Status on the
control panel. Then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page 32).
4. Copying
103
Using the Quick Copy menu
The Quick Copy menu allows you to quickly set common copy options without
having to open a lower level menu or another tab. However, this menu does not
offer every copy option available.
1
2
Tap Quick Copy from the home screen or Apps.
3
Adjust the settings (Paper Source, Reduce/Enlarge, Original
Orientation, Darkness, Duplex, N-UP, Collation).
4
Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad (or +, button) on the control panel, if necessary.
5
Press
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
(Start) on the control panel to begin copying.
To cancel the current copy job, tap
(Stop) > tap Job Status on the
control panel. Then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page 32).
4. Copying
104
ID card copying
3
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
4
Tap
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
1
2
Tap ID Copy from the home screen or Apps.
If necessary, adjust the settings for each copy such as Print Layout,
Original Size, Paper Source, Adjust to Paper Size, and Align.
.
Your machine begins scanning the front side.
Follow the instructions on the control panel.
4. Copying
105
ID card copying
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
6
Tap
.
Your machine begins scanning the back side.
• If you do not press the
button, only the front side will be
copied.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
4. Copying
106
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
This chapter includes:
• Understanding the Scan & Send screen
108
• Basic scan
116
• Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
117
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
118
• Mac scanning
119
• Linux scanning
120
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
This section describes all scanning and fax functions. When you tap Send from
the home screen or Apps, the Send screen appears. This screen has two tabs
and many options. All options are grouped by feature so that you can configure
the job easily. If want to go home, tap the home(
Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
) button.
Command keys
Button
(quick menu) and then
Name
Description
Quick Menu
Open the quick menu.
Address book
Open your saved address book.
Fax
Send a fax.
My Program
Add an app to my program List.
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Open the sub menu.
click on any option you want to know about.
1
Send tab
+ Me
When users are logged in, the destination
configured in their My Page profile appears.You
can set the destination in the Send to
Destination menu of the My Page app (see "My
Page" on page 34). Administrators can also set
the default destination in the sub menu (Action
overflow) > Send Settings > + Me Setting.
You must log in to use your + Me
destination. If you do not log in, then the
machine sends the copy to the + Me
destination specified by the
administrator.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
108
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Virtual Hard Key
Preview
Preview displays the original scanned image.
• Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen.
• When an app is launched for the first time, the virtual hard keys are
shown.
Button
Name
Description
• If the screen is touched, the virtual hard keys always appear.
Setting
History
View changed options list.
• If the
Preview for
status
Shows the job preview.
Preview for
play
Scans for job.
Button
,
touched, the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown.
Name
Description
Reset
Reset to app default configuration.
On Hook
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone.
Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call
using speaker phone.
Stop
Stop a job at any time. A popup window appears toshow
the jobs that you can stop.
Start
: This button appears to edit when
scanning. Adjust the prescanned image
with operation functions such as rotate
and crop.
Start
Starts a job.
Start a job.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
109
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Adjusting the brightness
Selecting the original type
You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the brightness level
using the slider. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
images darker.
Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the
appropriate document type for a copy job.
Tap Darkness
to show the slider control.
•
Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
Sub menu (Action overflow)
Selecting the color mode
•
Add to My Program: Add an app to my program list. With this feature, user
can set default settings, destinations required for each program. Also can set
default options as Auto Launch, add shortcut to Home.
•
Search: Search for a desired options.
•
Build Job : This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in
the current job. If you select No, then the scanning process is completed and
the remainder of the job is performed.
•
Attach File Only : Allows you to attach a file to your message. You can use
this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive (BOX)
of the machine to an SMB, FTP, Email, Box, USB.
Use one of the following options to use for the scan.
•
Mono: Use black and white (1-bit per pixel).
•
Gray : Use grayscale (8-bit per pixel).
•
Color: Use color (24-bit per pixel, each of the RGB channels has 8 bits).
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
110
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
•
•
•
Save as Default : Allows you to save the current Scan & Send settings as the
default Scan & Send settings. After you save the default Scan & Send
settings, all future send tasks use these settings. Tap this option in the Action
Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan & Send
settings.
Restore Default : Allows you to restore the Scan & Send settings to the
default Scan & Send settings of the machine. This option changes the
current Scan & Send settings to the original settings configured at the
factory. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default
Scan & Send settings.
Send Settings: Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a
destination. The scanned document is sent as an image file. Tap this option
in the sub menu (action overflow menu) to scan and attach a file to the
current message.
-
Filing Policy : The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine
handles name conflicts when saving files.
Print Confirmation Report: You can use this feature to get
confirmation on executed Scan & Send destination's successfully or
not.
If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support,
then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters/fonts.
-
+Me Setting: Allows you to select the default destination for the send
job. When logged in, you can select your any Send destination as the
default send destination. Same will appear in Scan & Send widgets too.
-
Send to PC: Scans and sends scanned output to a computer.
•
Address Book Settings: This address book contains contacts that are
available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
available to anyone who uses the machine.
-
•
Google Address Book : This address book contains the contacts
registered in your Google contacts list. You must log into your Google
account to access your Google Address Book.
UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan
& Send menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove
menus. You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different
position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus.
Job progress
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
•
Detail : Tap this button to see the status, type, and time of the job.
•
Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied.
The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
the orientation and size of the printout.
•
Send Feedback : Allows you to send feedback about the current send job.
If you want to receive sending job by email, you can set from My page app
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 34).
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
on page 283).
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
111
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Setting options
•
2 Sided, Calendar: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back
is rotated 180 degrees.
You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab.
To use 2 Sided, Book and 2 Sided, Calendar, load the originals on the
DADF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it
automatically changes to 1 Sided.
• You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option
(Send >
Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration).
• Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Scan Options
Set file options of the scanned output.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
•
File Name: Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination.
•
File Format: Select a file format for the scanned output.
•
Resolution: Adjust the document resolution. The higher this value, the
clearer the result, but scan time may take longer.
•
Quality: Use this option to produce a high quality document. The higher
quality you select, the larger file size.
•
OCR Language: When producing scanned output for OCR software, select
the appropriate language.
Add Destination
Tap
to add a recipient’s email address or a fax number. If you want to send
to SMB, FTP, Box, PC, or USB click on respective buttons.
Original
This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type
for the current scan job.
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
•
2 Sided, Book: For originals that are printed on both sides.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
112
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Fax Options
•
Both Pages(From Right): Scans both facing pages from the right page.
If you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can
adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax.
•
Book Center & Edge Erase: You can set shaded areas to erase shadows
caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies.
•
Resolution
-
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will
reduce the transmission time.
-
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing small characters, thin
lines, or text from a dot-matrix printer.
-
-
Advanced Fax (fax user only)
Set the sending options for fax, such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing fine details. This
option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super
Fine resolution.
•
Quick Start Fax: The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the
first page has been scanned. Originals with many pages can be sent this way
without overflowing the machine’s memory.
Ultra Fine: Recommended for originals containing extremely fine
details. This option is only available if the receiving machine also
supports Ultra Fine resolution.
•
Delay Send: Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time. Define the
Job Name and Start Time.
Book Scan
Use this feature to scan a book. If the book is too thick, lift the DADF until its
hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the DADF. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the DADF open.
•
Off: Disable this feature.
•
Left Page: Scans only the left page of the book.
•
Right Page: Scans only the right page of the book.
•
Both Pages(From Left): Scans both facing pages from the left page.
You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours
after the scan.
Email Settings
Set email information, such as From, Subject and Message.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
113
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Color Mode
Original Type
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document
type for the current job.
•
Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
Use one of these options to scan the original among Color, Gray or Mono.
•
Mono: Displays an image in black and white.
•
Gray: Displays an image in gray.
•
Color: Displays an image in color.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option, if Mono
has been selected for Color Mode.
Original Size
Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
•
Auto: Automatically detect the size of original (see "Media sizes
automatically detected" on page 53).
•
Mixed Size: Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a
combination of different paper types.
•
Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper, use
the arrows to set the required size.
Original Orientation
Use this option to set the orientation of the original.
•
Upright Images: The original is in landscape orientation. The images or text
in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page.
•
Sideways Images: The original is in portrait orientation. The images or text
in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page.
Image Adjustment
This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness, Sharpness and
Contrast.
•
Darkness: Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file. This
feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little
contrast.
•
Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read.
You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images.
•
Contrast: allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output
crisper or smoother. You can use this feature to improve the quality of an
image or increase the readability of text.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
114
Understanding the Scan & Send screen
Background Adjustment
This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
background, such as newspapers or catalogs. You can use the options in this
menu to make the copies easier to read.
•
Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background
in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
•
Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
your scanned output is clearly legible.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
115
Basic scan
This is the usual procedure to scan your original documents.
1
2
Tap Scan & Send from the home screen or Apps.
3
4
Adjust the settings in the Send tab and More tab.
5
Tap
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
Select a destination using
(Add Destination), + Me, Email, SMB,
FTP, Box, USB, PC or
(Address book).
.
(Start ) from the control panel to begin scan.
To cancel the current send job, tap
(Stop), then tap Job Status on the
control panel, and then delete the job you want (see "Job Status" on page
32).
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
116
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you need to use TWAINcompliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
3
4
5
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned images.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
117
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats (including .epub). These documents
can be shared oversocial networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a student
organizing research from a library or a stay-at-home parent sharing scanned
pictures from last year’s birthday party, Easy Document Creator will provide you
with the necessary tools.
• Available for Windows OS only.
• Requires Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher.
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you
install the machine software.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides the following features:
•
Image Scanning: Use to scan single or multiple pictures.
•
Document Scanning: Use to scan documents with text or text andimages.
•
Text Converting: Use to scan documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
•
Book Scanning: Use to scan books with the flatbed scanner.
•
SNS Upload: Use to quickly and easily upload scanned images or existing
images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
•
E-Book Conversion: Use to scan multiple documents together as one ebook or combine existing files into an e-book.
•
Plug-in: Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program.
Click
(Help) in the upper-right corner of the window, then click on any
option you want to know more about.
2
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 42).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
From the Windows Start menu, click Programs or All Programs.
Click Samsung Printers, and run Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click Scan from the home screen.
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview.
Select Save to Location, Send to Email, or Send to SNS.
Click Save (to save the scanned image), Send (to email the scanned
image), or Share (to upload the scanned image).
If there is room on the scanning glass, you can scan more than one item at
a time. Use the
tool to define multiple selection areas.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
118
Mac scanning
3
4
Scanning from USB connected machine
1
2
3
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 42).
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
Scanning from network connected machine
1
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
3
4
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 42).
According to OS, follow steps below.
•
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
•
4
5
Select the option you want.
Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version.
5
6
For 10.5
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
For 10.6 -10.9, select your device below SHARED.
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version.
• For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the
Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
119
Linux scanning
5
Scanning
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not
installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you
may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install
xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane).
3
4
Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply.
Click the Scan button.
5. Scan & Send(Scanning)
120
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
This guide gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
• Preparing to fax
122
• Using a fax in your computer
123
• Understanding the fax screen
125
• Sending a fax
133
• Receiving a fax
136
Preparing to fax
• You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone. For
more information, ask your internet service provider.
• We recommend you use traditional analog phone services like PSTN
(public switched telephone network) when using a phone line as a fax
line. If you use internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the
connection quality by using a micro-filter. A micro-filter reduces noise
and improves connection quality. Since a DSL micro-filter is not provided
with the machine, contact your internet service provider.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
Before you send or receive a fax, you must connect the supplied cord to the wall
jack. Refer to “ Quick installation guide “. The method of connecting a telephone
line varies by country.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
122
Using a fax in your computer
You can send a fax directly from your computer. Make sure that your machine
and the computer are connected to the same network.
2
Checking a sent fax list (Windows)
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.
1
Sending a fax (Windows)
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. You can install the Samsung Network PC Fax driver from the
software CD. When the installation window appears, select Installation Now.
You can select the Samsung Network PC Fax driver in the Select Software
window.
1
2
Open the document you want to send.
Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3
4
5
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
Click Print or OK.
For more information about Fax Transmission History, click Help.
3
Sending a fax (Mac)
To send a fax from your computer, the Fax Utilities program must be installed.
This program is installed when you install the printer driver.
The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6. Depending on the
OS version, the following steps may be different. Before sending a fax, add a fax
driver using Fax Queue Creator.
Enter the recipient’s fax number and set any options if necessary.
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click Help.
6
From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers >
Network PC Fax > Fax Transmission History. Then, the Fax Journal appears
with the fax list you have sent.
Click Send.
1
2
3
Open the document you want to send.
Select Print from the File menu.
Select a fax driver from the Printer list.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
123
Using a fax in your computer
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Choose the number of copies and pages.
Choose your paper size, orientation, and scale.
Enter the recipients’ fax number in To input box. If you have stored
frequently-used fax numbers, you can also use Addresses by pressing
the
button.
If necessary, enter the access code in Dialing Prefix.
If necessary, check Use Cover page to send the fax with a cover page.
Enter the subject and message of the fax job.
Click Fax.
The Fax Queue icon (
) appears on your Mac dock. Click the icon to
see the status of the fax job. You can also delete, hold, pause and resume
jobs from this window.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
124
Understanding the fax screen
Tap Scan & Send from the home screen or Apps, then tap
screen. If you see a different screen, tap the
to open the Fax
Command keys
icon to go to the home screen.
Button
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and then
Name
Description
Quick Menu
Open the quick menu.
Address book
Open your saved address book.
Fax
Send a fax.
My Program
Add an app to my program List.
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Open the sub menu.
click on any option you want to know about.
• You can set the general options (see "Setting options" on page 112).
4
Send tab
+ Me
When users are logged in, the destination
configured in their My Page profile appears.You
can set the destination in the Send to
Destination menu of the My Page app (see "My
Page" on page 34). Administrators can also set the
default destination in the sub menu (Action
overflow) > Send Settings > + Me Setting.
You must log in to use your + Me
destination. If you do not log in, then the
machine sends the copy to the + Me
destination specified by the
administrator.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
125
Understanding the fax screen
Virtual Hard Key
Button
• Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen.
• When an app is launched for the first time, the virtual hard keys are
shown.
• If the screen is touched, the virtual hard keys always appear.
• If the
Button
,
Setting
History
View changed options list.
Preview for
status
Shows the job preview.
Preview for
play
Scans for job.
: This button appears to edit when
scanning. Adjust the prescanned image
with operation functions such as rotate
and crop.
Description
Reset
Reset to app default configuration.
On Hook
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone.
Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call
using speaker phone.
Start
Description
touched, the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown.
Name
Stop
Name
Stop a job at any time. A popup window appears to
show the jobs that you can stop.
Start a job.
Preview
Start
Starts a job.
Adjusting the brightness
You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the
original contains faint markings or dark images. Adjust the brightness level
using the slider. This feature allows you to print dark images lighter, or light
images darker.
Tap Darkness
to show the slider control.
Preview displays the original scanned image.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
126
Understanding the fax screen
Selecting the color mode
•
Build Job : This option can be turned on or off. When this option is on:After
the scanning is finished, the Scan More window appears to ask if you want
to scan another page. If you select Yes, then you can scan another page in
the current job. If you select No, then the scanning process is completed and
the remainder of the job is performed.
•
Attach File Only : Allows you to attach a file to your message. You can use
this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive (BOX)
of the machine to an SMB, FTP, Email, Box, USB.
•
Save as Default : Allows you to save the current Scan & Send settings as the
default Scan & Send settings. After you save the default Scan & Send
settings, all future send tasks use these settings. Tap this option in the Action
Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan & Send
settings.
•
Restore Default : Allows you to restore the Scan & Send settings to the
default Scan & Send settings of the machine. This option changes the
current Scan & Send settings to the original settings configured at the
factory. Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default
Scan & Send settings.
•
Send Settings: Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a
destination. The scanned document is sent as an image file. Tap this option
in the sub menu (action overflow menu) to scan and attach a file to the
current message.
Use one of the following options to use for the scan.
•
Mono: Use black and white (1-bit per pixel).
•
Gray : Use grayscale (8-bit per pixel).
•
Color: Use color (24-bit per pixel, each of the RGB channels has 8 bits).
Selecting the original type
Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the
appropriate document type for a copy job.
•
Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
Sub menu (Action overflow)
•
•
Add to My Program: Add an app to my program list. With this feature, user
can set default settings, destinations required for each program. Also can set
default options as Auto Launch, add shortcut to Home.
Search: Search for a desired options.
-
Filing Policy : The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine
handles name conflicts when saving files.
-
Print Confirmation Report: You can use this feature to get
confirmation on executed Scan & Send destination's successfully or
not.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
127
Understanding the fax screen
•
If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support,
then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters/fonts.
•
-
+Me Setting: Allows you to select the default destination for the send
job. When logged in, you can select your any Send destination as the
default send destination. Same will appear in Scan & Send widgets too.
-
Send to PC: Scans and sends scanned output to a computer.
Address Book Settings: This address book contains contacts that are
available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
available to anyone who uses the machine.
-
•
Google Address Book : This address book contains the contacts
registered in your Google contacts list. You must log into your Google
account to access your Google Address Book.
UI Configuration: Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan
& Send menu. Tap the + or - symbol on the menu icons to add or remove
menus. You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different
position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus.
Send Feedback : Allows you to send feedback about the current send job.
If you want to receive sending job by email, you can set from My page app
(see "Understanding the My Page menu" on page 34).
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
on page 283).
Setting options
You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab.
• You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option
(Send >
• Some menus are disabled. If so, it is not available to your machine.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
Job progress
Sub menu(action overflow) > UI Configuration).
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
•
Detail : Tap this button to see the status, type, and time of the job.
•
Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied.
The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
the orientation and size of the printout.
Add Destination
Tap
to add a recipient’s email address or a fax number. If you want to send
to SMB, FTP, Box, PC, or USB click on respective buttons.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
128
Understanding the fax screen
Original
•
This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type
for the current scan job.
OCR Language: When producing scanned output for OCR software, select
the appropriate language. This is supported when Searchable PDF option is
selected in File Format settings.
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
Fax Options
•
2 Sided, Book: For originals that are printed on both sides.
•
2 Sided, Calendar: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the back
is rotated 180 degrees.
If you send originals that are of poor quality, or contain photographs, you can
adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax.
To use 2 Sided, Book and 2 Sided, Calendar, load the originals on the
DADF. If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it
automatically changes to 1 Sided.
•
Resolution
-
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option will
reduce the transmission time.
-
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing small characters, thin
lines, or text from a dot-matrix printer.
-
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing fine details. This
option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super
Fine resolution.
-
Ultra Fine: Recommended for originals containing extremely fine
details. This option is only available if the receiving machine also
supports Ultra Fine resolution.
Scan Options
Set file options of the scanned output.
•
File Name: Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination.
•
File Format: Select a file format for the scanned output.
•
Resolution: Adjust the document resolution. The higher this value, the
clearer the result, but scan time may take longer.
•
Quality: Use this option to produce a high quality document. The higher
quality you select, the larger file size.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
129
Understanding the fax screen
Book Scan
You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours
after the scan.
Use this feature to scan a book. If the book is too thick, lift the DADF until its
hinges are engaged by the stopper, then close the DADF. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the DADF open.
•
Off: Disable this feature.
•
Left Page: Scans only the left page of the book.
•
Right Page: Scans only the right page of the book.
•
Both Pages(From Left): Scans both facing pages from the left page.
•
Both Pages(From Right): Scans both facing pages from the right page.
•
Book Center & Edge Erase: You can change the void area setting for the
binding around the entire book-edge; or for the center width and side
edges.
Advanced Fax (fax user only)
Email Settings
Set email information, such as From, Subject and Message.
Original Type
Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document
type for the current job.
•
Text: Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images.
•
Text/Photo: Use if the original is a mix of text and images.
•
Photo: Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images.
Set the sending options for fax, such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send.
•
Off: Disables this feature.
•
Quick Start Fax: The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the
first page has been scanned. Originals with many pages can be sent this way
without overflowing the machine’s memory.
•
Delay Send: Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time. Define the
Job Name and Start Time.
Original Size
Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals.
•
Auto: Automatically detect the size of original (see "Media sizes
automatically detected" on page 53).
•
Custom size: If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper, use
the arrows to set the required size.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
130
Understanding the fax screen
Image Adjustment
Original Orientation
Use this option to set the orientation of the original.
This option allows you to manually adjust the image.
•
Upright Images: The original is in landscape orientation. The images or text
in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page.
•
•
Sideways Images: The original is in portrait orientation. The images or text
in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page.
Darkness: Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file. This
feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little
contrast.
•
Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read.
You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images.
•
Contrast: allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output
crisper or smoother. You can use this feature to improve the quality of an
image or increase the readability of text.
Color Mode
Use one of these options to scan the original among Color, Gray or Mono.
•
Mono: Displays an image in black and white.
•
Gray: Displays an image in gray.
•
Color: Displays an image in color.
Background Adjustment
This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the
background, such as newspapers or catalogs. You can use the options in this
menu to make the copies easier to read.
JPEG file format cannot be selected if color mode is set as MONO.
•
Background Density: Allows you to adjust the density of the background
in the scanned image. This feature is useful when scanning originals that
have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background.
•
Backside Image: Allows you to erase any text or images that show through
from the other side of the original. You can use this feature to ensure that
your scanned output is clearly legible.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
131
Understanding the fax screen
5
Button
Fax screen
Name
Description
Recent
View any recently-used addresses.
Groups
Open a list of group addresses.
Contacts
Open a list of your contacts.
Pause
Pause the current job.
Add Contacts
Add a new contact to your addresses.
Add To
Add to the destination list.
Destination List
Open the destination list.
On Hook
Enable On Hook dialing. When you hear the dial
tone, enter a fax number using the numeric
keypad on the control screen.
Send
Send the fax.
Command keys
Button
Name
Description
Keypad
Open the keypad.
Favorites
Open a list of frequently-used addresses.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
132
Sending a fax
This section explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission.
8
Tap
or select other settings.
7
You can place the originals use either the DSDF or the scanner glass. If the
originals are placed on both the DSDF and the scanner glass, the machine
will read the originals on the DSDF first, because it has higher scan priority.
Sending a fax
1
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
2
3
4
Tap Send from the home screen or Apps.
6
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to specify your fax number on any fax
you send.
1
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Machine ID & Fax No on the display
screen.
2
3
Tap the ID Name input box. The pop-up keyboard appears.
4
5
6
7
Adjust the document settings in the Send tab or More tab.
Tap
and enter a fax number directly using
on the screen, then tap
or using Favorites, Recent, Groups, Contacts tap from the display
screen.
• You can send a fax up to 10 destinations at once.
Enter your name or the company name (see "Understanding the pop-up
keyboard" on page 35).
• You can view and delete a destination from Destination List (
).
• To insert a pause, tap
while entering the fax number. A dash (-)
appears on the display when a pause is inserted.
Tap Done.
• If you want to use On Hook dial, tap
and enter a fax number using
the numeric keypad on the screen while you hear the dial tone.
Tap the Fax Number input box.
Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel.
Tap Done.
5
Press
to start the process.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
133
Sending a fax
• You can send a fax directly from your computer (see "Using a fax in your
computer" on page 123).
• When you want to cancel a fax job,tap
(Stop) from virtual hard key
before the machine starts transmission. Or tap Job Status from the
home screen or Apps, select the job you want to delete (see "Job Status"
on page 32).
• You cannot send emails with the machine while it is sending a fax.
Sending a fax manually using an extension
telephone
This method is sending a fax using an extension telephone. Make sure that
extension telephone is connected to the EXT. socket of the fax kit on the
machine.
1
2
Pick up the receiver of the extension telephone.
3
Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF (see "Loading originals"
on page 42).
4
5
6
7
Tap Send from the home screen or Apps.
When you hear the dial tone, dial a fax number using the extension
telephone.
Sending a fax using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number for your fax, you can use
a speed dial number previously set by you.
• 1-500 can be assigned for the speed dial numbers
• For one-digit speed dial numbers, press and hold the corresponding
number on the numeric keypad on the control panel.
• For two or more digit speed dial numbers, press the first digit button and
hold the last number on the numeric keypad on the control panel.
Adjust the document settings in the Send tab or More tab.
Tap
on the control panel. The pop-up manual fax appears.
Tap Send on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax signal
from the extension telephone.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
134
Sending a fax
Resending automatically
If the line is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the machine
automatically redials the number.
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial
attempts, follow the steps below:
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Redial on the display screen.
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time (see "Advanced Fax (fax
user only)" on page 113).
To cancel a delayed fax, tap Off before it is sent.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
135
Receiving a fax
This section explains how to receive faxes, and the special options available.
9
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
8
Changing Receive Mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook and then pressing
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call after a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax. If you want to change to another receive mode, follow the steps
below:
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Mode on the display screen.
•
Telephone: Receive faxes by pressing On Hook and then
(Start) from
virtual hard key.
•
Fax: Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax
reception mode.
•
Answering Machine/Fax: Use when an answering machine is attached to
your machine. Your machine answers the incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax
tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive
the fax.
(Start)
from virtual hard key when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The
machine begins receiving a fax.
10
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
the back of your machine. For more details, refer to “Fax kit installation guide”.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine records the message as
normal. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to
receive the fax.
Receive start code: When you receive a call on the extension phone and
hear fax tones, press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine
receives the fax. Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax
tone from the remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
136
Receiving a fax
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is turned off, or no answering machine is connected to the EXT socket,
your machine automatically enters Fax mode after a predefined number
of rings.
• If your answering machine has a configurable ring counter, set it to
answer incoming calls before it rings more than once.
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering machine.
Otherwise, outgoing messages from the answering machine will
interrupt your phone conversations.
4
Tap Done.
12
Receiving in Secure Receive mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing
of incoming faxes when the machine is unattended. In Secure Receive mode, all
incoming faxes are saved to memory.
1
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Secure Receive on the display screen.
11
Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected
to the EXT. socket on your machine.When you receive a call on the extension
phone and hear fax tones, press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The
machine receives the fax.Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear
the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.To change
the *9* to, for example, *3*, follow the steps below:
1
2
3
Secure Receive mode can only be configured by a user with a registered ID
and a password on the machine. When the machine requests, enter your ID
and password.
2
Tab On to enable this feature.
When the machine receives a fax in this mode, Print option becomes
available. If you want to print the secured faxes, tap Print. All secured faxes
will then be printed.
Tap Settings > Fax Settings> Receive Mode on the display screen.
Tab On to enable this feature.
Enter number 3 using
3
If you want to set a passcode, tab the passcode blank and enter a
passcode.
on the screen.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
137
Receiving a fax
4
If you want incoming faxes to be always saved to memory, tap Whole
Day. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
5
Tap Start Time and set the specific start time using the up/down
buttons. Tap Set when finished.
6
Tap End Time and set the specific end time using the up/down buttons.
Tap Set when finished.
7
Tap
or select other settings.
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, tap Off. Incoming faxes will be
automatically printed again.
13
Setting Received Fax Printing
•
Auto Reduction: Set to reduce the size of incoming pages automatically.
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper
loaded in the paper tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to
fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine. If you do not enable this
option, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page. The
original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages.
•
Printing Large Pages: Use to fit where faxes are printed.
•
Stamp Received Name: Print the received fax information on printouts.
•
Paper Source: Select a tray as the paper source.
14
Forwarding faxes
You can set your machine to forward sent or received faxes to email, SMB, FTP,
etc. If you are out of the office but need to receive faxes, this feature may be
useful.
Use this option to set printing options for received faxes.
15
Tap Settings > Fax Settings > Received Fax Printing on the display screen.
•
Duplex: The machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper.
•
Output Tray: Specify the tray where the fax is printed.
General fax settings
You can set the default fax options. Set the most frequently-used fax settings.
Tap Settings > Fax Settings on the display screen.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
138
Receiving a fax
Option
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
Dial Mode
Set the dialing mode to either tone or pulse.
This setting may not be available depending
on your country.
ECM Mode
Set the machine to correct errors. This helps
overcome poor line quality and ensures any
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any
other error correction-equipped fax machine.
Sending a fax in this mode may take more
time.
Modem Speed
Set the modem speed (4.8Kbps - 33.6Kbps).
Receive Mode
Select the fax receiving mode.
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
• You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open a
web browser from a networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > Fax (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
Option
Description
Description
Machine ID & Fax No
You can set the machine ID and fax number to
be printed at the top of each page.
• Telephone: Press On Hook Dial and then
Start to receive a fax.
Redial
Set the machine to re-dial the fax number if
the recipient’s fax line is busy or not answered.
Set the number of re-dial attempts and the
interval between attempts.
• Fax: Receive incoming faxes normally and
immediately enter the fax reception mode.
• Answering Machine/Fax: Use when an
answering machine is attached to your
machine. Your machine answers the
incoming call, and the caller can leave a
message on the answering machine. If the
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line,
the machine automatically switches to Fax
mode to receive the fax.
• Redial Term: Select terms for re-dialing
using the up/down arrows.
• Redial Times: Select a re-dial time using
the up/down arrows. Select 0 to disable
redialing.
Prefix Dial
Set the number to be dialed before the
destination number. Users may use this to
access a PABX (e.g. 9) or an area code (e.g. 02).
Once this number is set, it automatically
appears on the screen when entering a
phone/fax number.
Ring to Answer
Set the number of times the machine rings
before answering an incoming call.
Toll Save
Set the machine to send faxes in the toll save
time to reduce phone bill costs.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
139
Receiving a fax
Option
DRPD Mode
Junk Fax Setup
Secure Receivea
Description
Enable a user to answer several different
phone numbers on the same telephone line.
Set the machine to recognize different ring
patterns for each number. This setting may
not be available in your country.
Use this feature to reject faxes sent from
numbers stored in memory as junk fax
numbers. This feature is useful to block any
unwanted faxes. When you turn this feature
on, you can access additional options to set
junk fax numbers. This option may not be
available in your country.
Set the machine to save the received faxes in
memory so that unauthorized people cannot
access them when you are absent. This option
restricts printing of received faxes when the
machine is unattended.
• Off: Select to not use secure receive.
Option
Smart Fax Diagnostics
Description
The Smart Fax feature optimizes the settings
for your fax line.
• Auto Configuration: When sending and
receiving faxes, the machine regularly
checks for errors and automatically
configures the fax settings to ensure a
stable connection.
• Start: Allows you to automatically detect
or manually specify the environment when
sending or receiving faxes. Select Auto
Detection to automatically detect the
environment, or manually specify the
faxing environment as Normal,
VoIP(Office), Noise(Home), or Big Noise.
• Initialize Diagnostics Settings: Resets all
the settings.
a. May only be available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings
selected (see "Authentication" on page 292).
• On: Select to use secure receive.
• Print: Select to print faxes in the memory.
You need to log-in as an administrator to
print out received faxes in memory.
Received Fax Printing
Set options to print received faxes.
Fax Country Setting
Select a country as default. Before changing
this, connect a telephone line to the machine.
When you change the country, a ping test is
performed.
6. Scan & Send(Faxing)
140
7. Setting up an address
book
This guide gives you guidelines for the address book.
This chapter includes:
• Understanding the address screen
142
• Using the control panel
144
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service
148
Understanding the address screen
The Address book app allows you to access and save frequently used addresses
in the machine. You can save fax numbers and email addresses as well as
addresses for SMB, FTP, and and so on.
Tap Address Book from the home screen or Apps. If you see a different screen,
tap
to go to the home display screen.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
1
Address screen
You can save frequently used fax numbers, e-mail addresses, SMB server
addresses, FTP server addresses in your machine.
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
• You can set general options (see "Setting options" on page 112).
•
Contacts: Displays the name and contact information of contacts saved in
the address book.
•
Favorites: Displays the name and contact information of contacts marked
as favorites in the address book.
•
Groups: Lists the groups registered in the address book and the users
registered to those groups.
7. Setting up an address book
142
Understanding the address screen
Sub menu (Action overflow)
You cannot add a group as a member of another group.
To use some features, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Login" on page 283).
Command keys
To use some features, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Login" on page 283).
Button
Name
Description
Quick Menu
Show the quick menu.
Address book
Open your list of addresses
Search
Search for a desired address.
Add
Add a contact, favorites, or group.
Edit
Select the address you want to edit and tap this
button.
My Program
Shows list of added programs.
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Open the sub menu.
•
Search: Searches the names and contact information in the Contacts list.
•
Delete Contacts: Delete the contacts you set.
•
Import: You can import the address book saved from another MFP or
sameMFP.
•
Export: You can export the address book saved from another MFP or
sameMFP.
7. Setting up an address book
143
Using the control panel
6
2
Storing individual addresses
1
Tap Address on the home screen or Apps > Tap
screen
2
Tap the Name input box, and then enter the name of the recipient.
• If the SMB server you entered is not registered to any domain, leave it
blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server.
Tab
• User Login Name: Select this option to create a sub-folder in the file
folder you selected. The sub-folder is named according to the user name
entered in step 5. If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same
name, the machine does not create a sub-folder.
3
4
(add) on the display
Tap the SMB, Email, and/or FTP input boxes to enter that information of
the recipient.
(favorites) icon for addresses you use often and want to find easily.
Tap the Email input boxes to enter that information of the recipient.
Speed No. is automatically assigned with the first number of unused
numbers.
• If you want a SMB or FTP server to allow anonymous connections, select
the Anonymous from Login Type.
• Folder Creation Cycle: Set the cycle of sub-folder creation. The machine
creates sub-folders according to this option. If the file folder already has
a sub-folder of the same name, the machine does not create a sub-folder.
- Every Day: A sub-folder is created every day using the name format
“YYYY-MM-DD” (for example, “2014-01-01”).
Use the Speed No. on the numeric keypad to select an address quickly.
5
Tap the Fax input box and enter the fax number using the numeric
keypad on the control panel. You can enter only numbers, area code first
if necessary.
• Inserting a pause: On some telephone systems, you must dial an access
code (like 9) and listen for a second dial tone before dialing the number.
In such cases, you can insert a pause in the telephone number.
7. Setting up an address book
144
Using the control panel
- Every Month: A sub-folder is created every month using the name
format “YYYY-MM” (for example, “2014-01”).
If you want to delete an individual address, check the box of that address
- Every Year: A sub-folder is created every year using the name format
“YYYY” (for example, “2014”).
and tap
• Create Group For Multiple Files: If you select this option and scan
multiple files, the machine creates a sub-folder in the file folder you
selected to store all sent files.
If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time, sent files are
stored as below.
- When a single scanned file is sent:
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOC.jpg
Sub menu (Action overflow) > Delete Contacts.
3
Tap the input field for the information you want to change. The pop-up
keyboard appears, allowing you to type in the field.
4
Tap Done to save the information.
4
- When multiple scanned files are sent:
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC000.jpg
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC001.jpg
\\folder\user name\2014-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC002.jpg
7
Tap OK to save the information.
3
Editing Individual address
Storing address groups
1
Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps > Groups >
display screen.
2
3
Tap the Name input field and enter a name for the group.
When editing a contact, tap a field to change or delete the information, or add
additional fields to the contact’s information.
1
2
Tap +Add Contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want
include in the group. Tap Done when you are finished.
To search for a contact, tap the search field in the +Add Contact screen.
Enter the first few letters of a contact’s name or tap the
(search) icon to
show all contacts. In the list that appears, check the boxes for the contacts
you want to add and tap Done.
Tap Address book > Contacts on the home screen or Apps.
Tap the name of individual you want to edit. Tap
on the
(edit).
4
Tap Done to save the information.
7. Setting up an address book
145
Using the control panel
5
6
Editing address groups
1
2
Searching for address book entries
Tap Address book > Groups on the home screen or Apps.
Tap the name of group you want to edit and tap
You can search the addresses that are currently stored in the address book.
(edit).
If you want to delete an address group, check the box for the group you
want to delete and tap
3
4
1
2
Tap Address book > Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps.
3
The machine then displays the search results.
Tap the
(search) input field and enter a name or part of a name to
search for.
(delete).
Tap the group name input field to change the name of the group.
Tap +Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want
include in the group. Tap Done when you are finished.
7
Deleting address book entries
You can delete addresses currently stored in the address book.
To search for a contact, tap the search field in the +Add contact screen.
Enter the first few letters of a contact’s name or tap the
To use this feature, you may need to log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in"
on page 283).
(search) icon to
show all contacts. In the list that appears, check the boxes for the contacts
you want to add and tap Done.
5
To remove an individual address from the group, check the box for that
address and tap
(delete).
6
Tap Done to save the information.
1
2
Tap Address book > Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps.
Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and tap tap
Sub menu (Action overflow) > Delete Contacts.
7. Setting up an address book
146
Using the control panel
3
Tap OK in the confirmation window and the selected addresses are
deleted from the address book.
8
Viewing the address book
You can browse for individual addresses and groups.
1
2
Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps.
Tap an address to see more information about it.
You can tap
(edit) when viewing an address to edit its information
directly, or when viewing an address group to see a list of that group’s
members.
7. Setting up an address book
147
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
You can store addresses conveniently from the networked computer using
SyncThru™ Web Service. Only for users registered on the machine can store
addresses through login SyncThru™ Web Service.
9
• A Speed Dial Number allows you to enter that number on the numeric
keypad to dial that number quickly.
9
• Check Favorites for addresses you use often. You can easily find them in
search results.
Storing on your local machine
This method allows you to store addresses on your machine’s memory. You can
add addresses and group them into categories.
Adding individual addresses to the address book
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123)
Enter a name to add and select a speed dial number in the General field.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Enter an email address in the Email field.
Enter a fax number in the Fax field.
Check the enable SMB box in SMB and enter the SMB information.
Enter a server IP address or a host name in SMB Server Address.
Enter a server port number in SMB Server Port.
Enter a login name in Login Name.
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
If you want to allow anonymous connections to your SMB or FTP server,
check the Anonymous box. This box is unchecked by default. If you
checked the Anonymous box, go to step 18.
Click Login.
Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to.
Click Login.
16
Enter a password in Password and re-enter the same password in
Confirm Password.
17
Enter a domain name in Domain.
Click Address Book.
Click Add.
7. Setting up an address book
148
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
If the SMB server you entered is not registered to a domain, leave this field
blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server.
18
Enter the scan file folder to store scanned images in Path.
•
Example: /shared_Folder/
19
Select Scan folder creating policy options:
•
Create new folder using login name: If you select this option, the
machine creates a sub-folder in the file folder you selected. The subfolder is named using the user name from step 15.
Day: A sub-folder is created every day using the name format
“YYYY-MM-DD” (for example, “2012-01-01”).
Year: A sub-folder is created every year using the name format
“YYYY” (for example, “2012”).
Create new folder only if scan output consist of several files: If
you select this option and multiple files are scanned, the machine
creates sub-folders in the file folder you selected and the sent files
are stored in the sub-folder.
• When multiple scanned files are sent:
\\folder\user name\2012-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC000.jpg
\\folder\user name\2012-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC001.jpg
\\folder\user name\2012-01-01\DOCJPEG\DOC002.jpg
20
-
-
• When a single scanned file is sent:
\\folder\user name\2012-01-01\DOC.jpg
Create new folder every: You can set the cycle of sub-folder
creation. The machine create a sub-folder according to these
options:
If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same name, the machine
does not create a sub-folder.
Month: A sub-folder is created every month using the name
format “YYYY-MM” (for example, “2012-01”).
If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time, sent files are
stored as below.
If the file folder already has a sub-folder of the same name, the machine
does not create a sub-folder.
•
-
Select the policy for generating file names in Filing Policy. If the server
already contains a file of the same name, the file is processed based on
the following options.
•
Change Name: The sent file is automatically saved as a pre-defined
file name.
•
Cancel: Do not save the sent file.
•
Overwrite: Overwrite the existing file with the newly sent file.
7. Setting up an address book
149
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
21
22
23
24
Enter the file name in File Name to store on the server.
To verify that the process is working with your settings, click Test.
Enter FTP server information as you did for SMB.
8
9
10
Check the box for the address you want to edit and click Edit.
Change the address information.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Undo to reverse any changes you entered. Click Cancel to close the
window without saving any changes.
Click Undo to delete the information you entered. If you click Cancel, the
Add window is closed.
Deleting individual addresses in Address Book
Editing individual addresses in Address Book
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
4
5
6
7
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123).
Click Login.
Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to.
Click Login.
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
4
5
6
7
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser(for example,
http://123.123.123.123).
Click Login.
Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to.
Click Login.
Click Address Book.
Click Address Book.
7. Setting up an address book
150
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
8
Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and click Delete.
8
Enter a name or part of a name to search for in the search field.
Check the box at the top of the column to select all addresses.
You can search for addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number,
Email, SMB, and so on.
Click OK in the confirmation window to delete the addresses.
For example, if you want to find a fax number, click the drop down list next
Searching for individual addresses in the address
book
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
4
5
6
7
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123)
Click Login.
to
9
Click
and select Fax Number.
and the search results appear.
You can see the addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number, Email,
SMB, etc.
For example, if you want to see the addresses which are included fax
number, click drop down list below LDAP and select Fax Number.
Enter your ID and password, and select a domain to log in to.
Click Login.
Click Address Book.
You can sort the address book by clicking each column header. For example,
click Speed No. to sort the addresses by speed dial number. Click a column
a second time to reverse the sort order.
Importing Address Book
You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the
machine by exporting to the machine from your computer.
Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file.
• Password-protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited.
• The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF-8.
• Do not change the first row (model name, version, title field).
7. Setting up an address book
151
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
• Use comma(,) as a separator.
Exporting Address Book
• When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine,
the existing address book data is deleted.
• Make sure to enter valid data. If you enter invalid data, unexpected errors
can occur. Refer to the below rules for entering valid data.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 8).
- Speed dial: A number is required for each address. You cannot use
duplicate numbers. Only numbers are allowed.
- User Name: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 64 byte
in UTF-8. <, “, >, \, / in not allowed.
- Fax: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 40 byte using
numbers (0-9) and special characters (#,*,-).
- Email: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 128 byte in
email address format (ex: printer@domain.com)
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Logging into SyncThru™ Web
Service" on page 159).
2
3
4
5
Click Address Book tab > Individual.
You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV
file format using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Logging into SyncThru™ Web
Service" on page 159).
2
3
4
Click Address Book tab > Individual.
Select Export from the Task drop down list.
Select the option you want and click the Export button.
Then the address book file stored in your computer.
Select Import from the Task drop down list.
Select Browse, and select the stored file.
Click Import > OK.
Grouping addresses in address book
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123).
7. Setting up an address book
152
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
4
5
Click Login.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Click Login.
Enter your ID and password and select a domain as you log in the
machine.
Editing address groups in Address Book
1
2
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser.
(Example, http://123.123.123.123)
Click Address Book.
Click Groups.
Click Add Group.
Enter the group name to be added in Group Name.
Check Add individual(s) after this group is created.
If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you
made, skip this step. You can add individual addresses next time pressing
Group Details.
12
13
Click Apply.
14
Click the arrow in the middle. The selected addresses are added in Group
Address Book.
15
Click Apply.
Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in
Individual Address Book.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service shows.
Click Login.
Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
machine.
Click Login.
Click Address Book.
Click Groups.
Check the group address you want to edit and press Edit Group.
Change the group address information.
Click Apply.
Press Undo to delete the information you entered. If you press Cancel, the
Edit window closes.
7. Setting up an address book
153
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Deleting address groups from Address Book
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
4
5
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
6
7
8
9
10
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123)
Checking address groups
You can see information about address groups and add or delete individual
addresses from the group in the Group Details window.
1
2
Open a web browser from your networked computer.
3
4
5
Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service page.
6
7
8
9
Click Login.
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in the browser (for example,
http://123.123.123.123)
Click Login.
Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
machine.
Click Login.
Click Login.
Enter the ID and password, and select a domain as you log in the
machine.
Click Address Book.
Click Groups.
Check the box for the groups you want to delete.
Click Delete Group.
Click OK when the confirmation window appears.
Click Address Book.
Click Groups.
Click the group address you want to see and click Group Details.
7. Setting up an address book
154
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
• You can add individual addresses directly. Check the addresses you want
to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book.
• You can delete individual addresses directly. Check the addresses you
want to delete and press Delete in Group Address Book.
7. Setting up an address book
155
8. Management tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Accessing management tools
157
• SyncThru™ Web Service
158
• Easy Capture Manager
165
• Samsung AnyWeb Print
166
• Easy Eco Driver
167
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
168
• Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
169
• Using Samsung Printer Status
172
• Using Samsung Printer Experience
174
• Using Box
180
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
•
3
4
5
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
Click the management tool you want to use.
• After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
• For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
8. Management tools
157
SyncThru™ Web Service
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network
environment through SyncThru™ Web Service.
• Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
• Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the
settings or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
1
What is SyncThru™Web Service?
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network
parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™ Web Service.
Use SyncThru™ Web Service to:
•
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
•
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
•
Change the printer preference.
•
Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
•
Get support for using the machine.
•
Upgrade machine software.
2
Required web browser
You need one of the following web browsers to use SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
•
Chrome 4.0 or higher
•
FireFox 3.0 or higher
•
Safari 3.0 or higher
3
Connecting to SyncThru™ Web Service
IPv4 supported web browser
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer®, that supports IPv4
addressing as a URL.
Enter the machine’s IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
You can get the machine’s IP address from the machine (see"Report" on
page 298).
2
Your machine’s SyncThru™ Web Service website opens.
8. Management tools
158
SyncThru™ Web Service
IPv6 supported web browser
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
A log-in page appears.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer®, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2
Select one of the IPv6 address (Stateless Address, Stateful Address,
Manual Address, Link-Local) from Network Configuration Report.
Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
machine (see "Log-in" on page 283.)
You can get the machine’s IPv6 address from the machine report
(see"Report" on page 298).
If you want to create a new user or change the password, see "Security tab"
on page 162.
3
2
Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. Then click on
LOGIN.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (eg., http://[3ffe:10:88:194:213:77ff:fe82:75b]).
The address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
4
Your machine’s SyncThru™ Web Service website opens.
4
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in, but
you will not have access to or view the Settings tab and the Security tab.
8. Management tools
159
SyncThru™ Web Service
•
5
Information tab
Print Information: You can print all the reports provided by your machine.
You can use these reports to help you maintain your machine. This feature
is also available in the machine (see "Report" on page 298).
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as the machine’s status, supplies’ status, count information,
network information, and more. You can also print reports, such as
configuration page.
•
Active Alerts: You can check the current alerts in the machine. Use this
information to troubleshoot machine errors.
•
Supplies: You can check the supplies’ information. For toner cartridges and
imaging units, supplies’ status is displayed with a visual graph showing you
the amount of each supply left. Page counts are also available which can
help you predict when to change the supplies. This feature is also available
from the machine (see "Management" on page 298).
•
Usage Counter: You can check the billing information and usage counter of
the machine. This feature is also available from the machine (see "Counter"
on page 32).
•
Current Settings: Shows the current settings of the machine and network.
•
Machine Information: Shows the current machine settings.
•
Network Information: Shows the current network settings. Use this page
as a reference and change the necessary settings needed for using the
network.
•
Security Information: Shows the current security settings of the machine
and network.
8. Management tools
160
SyncThru™ Web Service
6
7
Box tab
You can manage the Box. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Using Box" on page 180).
Forward / Print / Send / Download
You can manage the folder and files in Forward, Print, Send, Download.
•
Add: You can create Box in Print, Send, Download tab and Secured Box in
Print, Send tab.
•
Delete: You can delete Box and file in Forward, Print, Send, Download tab.
•
Edit: You can edit Box and file name in Print, Send, Download tab.
•
Browse: If you want to browse the Box, check the Box you want then click
Browse.
•
Task: You can copy and move the Box and files in Print, Send, Download
tab.
Address book tab
You can manage the address book. This feature is also available from the
machine (see "Understanding the address screen" on page 142).
•
Individual: You can manage individual entries in the address book.
•
Group: You can manage group address books.
8
Settings tab
Settings tab has sub menus, Machine Settings and Network Settings. You
cannot view or access this tab if you do not log-in as an administrator (see
"Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 159).
•
Machine Settings: You can set machine settings.
-
System: You can set machine related settings.
-
Printer: You can set print related settings such as darkness or adjust the
background. This feature is also available from the machine (see "Print
Settings" on page 295).
-
Copy: You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjusting
the background. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Setting options" on page 97).
-
Fax: You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial times.
This feature is also available from the machine (see "Understanding the
fax screen" on page 125).
8. Management tools
161
SyncThru™ Web Service
-
Scan & Send : You can set scan related settings. This feature is also
available from the machine (see "Understanding the Scan & Send
screen" on page 108).
-
HTTP: You can allow or block users from accessing the SyncThru™ Web
Service. This feature is also available from the machine (see "Network
Protocol" on page 302).
-
Box : You can set box related settings.This feature is also available from
the machine (see "Using Box" on page 180).
-
-
Address Book Settings: This address book contains contacts that are
available to all users. You can use the address book to make contacts
available to anyone who uses the machine.
Proxy: You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect
to licence server through http proxy server. These proxy settings are
provided currently only if the administrator wants to update an XOA
application’s license online through proxy server.
-
E-mail Notification: When an error occurs or the consumables are
running out, the machine sends a notification to the administrator via email. You can set whether to use this feature or not. You can also select
which alerts to receive and when.
9
•
Network Settings: You can set up the network environment to use your
machine as a network machine. You can also set the settings from the
machine. Refer to the network setup chapter (see "Network setup" on page
306).
-
General: You can set general machine information to use in the
network and set ethernet settings. This feature is also available from the
machine (see "Ethernet" on page 309).
-
TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6, Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP, Telnet, WSD, SLP, UPNP,
mDNS, CIFS, SNMP, SNMPv1/v2, SNMPv3: You can set protocol
settings.This feature is also available from the machine
-
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP): You can set server settings for outgoing
emails. If this setting is not configured, you cannot use scan to email
feature. Outgoing emails will be sent through SMTP server you set here.
This feature is also available from the machine (see "Network Protocol"
on page 302).
Security tab
The security tab has System Security, Network Security, User Access Control
and System Log. You cannot access this tab if you do not log-in as an
administrator (see "Log-in" on page 283).
•
System Security: From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Security tab >
System Security.
-
System Administrator: Enter the system administrator’s information.
The machine sends email notification to the email address set here. This
feature is also available from the machine (see "Contact Information" on
page 305).
-
Feature Management: You can enable/disable network features.
Check the features you want to enable and click Apply.
-
Information Hiding: You can enable/disable network features. Check
the features you want to enable and click Apply.
-
Restart Device: You can reboot your machine. Click the Restart Now
button to reboot.
8. Management tools
162
SyncThru™ Web Service
•
Network Security: From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Security tab
> Network Security.
-
-
Digital Certificate: You can manage digital certificates. A digital
certificate is an electronic certificate that verifies the secure association
between communication nodes. You need to add the certificate for SSL
communication. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Network Security" on page 303).
Secure Connection: You can enable or disable secure connection to
use more enhanced secure network channel. For secure
communication, using the Secure Connection feature is
recommended.
-
SNMPv3: You can set SNMPv3.
-
IP Security: You can set IP security settings.
-
IP/MAC Filtering: You can set filtering options for IP and MAC
addresses. If the administrator does not add a filtering rule for IPv4, IPv6,
and MAC addresses, nothing is filtered. If the administrator has added a
filtering rule, filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4, IPv6, and MAC
addresses.
-
-
-
IPv4 Filtering: You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage
filtering rules. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Network filtering settings" on page 314).
IPv6 Filtering: You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage
filtering rules. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Network filtering settings" on page 314).
-
802.1x: You can enable/disable 802.1x Security as well as manage
filtering rules. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"802.1x" on page 302).
•
External Authentication Server: Set the servers for authentication.
•
802.1x: You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based
authentication. If this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed
to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is
authorized. Use this feature to protect your network. This feature is also
available from the machine (see "802.1x" on page 302).
•
User Access Control: You can restrict users from accessing the machine or
application. You can also give specific permission for user to only use certain
feature of the machine. For example, you can allow user A to only use print
feature. In this case, user A will not be able to scan, copy or fax with the
machine.
-
Authentication (Activating access control): You can choose the
authentication method for user authentication. Select a mode and click
on the Options button. This feature is also available from the machine
(see "Authentication" on page 292).
-
Authorization (Giving rights): You can give permissions to a user to
only use certain features of the machine.
-
Authority Management: You can give different rights to different
users. For example, you can allow user A to use all the machine’s
functions while giving user B only the right to print.
-
Accounting: You can manage accounts.
MAC Filtering: You can enable/disable Mac filtering as well as manage
filtering rules. This feature is also available from the machine (see
"Network filtering settings" on page 314).
8. Management tools
163
SyncThru™ Web Service
-
•
User profile: You can store user information on the machine’s hard
drive. You can use this feature to manage the users using the machine.
You can also group the users and manage them as a group. You can add
up to 1,000 entries. User identified by user ID and password are allowed
to modify their password. They are allowed to view all of their profile
information. When it comes to the role, users are allowed to see only the
role they belong to but not its permissions.
System Log: You can keep logs of events that have happened in the
machine. The administrator can record and manage the machine usage
information by keeping the system log files. The system log files are stored
on the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), and when it is full, it will erase old
data. Export and save the important audit data separately using the
exporting feature.
-
Log configuration: You can enable or disable keeping logs. You can
also backup log files by periods and transfer to a repository server.
-
Log Viewer: You can view, delete, and search log files.
10
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware, managing
applications, and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also
connect to the Samsung website or download manuals and drivers by selecting
the Link menu.
•
Firmware Version: You can check the firmware version used in the machine.
Check the version and update it if necessary. This feature is also available
from the machine (see "Machine Details" on page 304).
•
Application Management: You can add or delete applications/license. If you
add an application, you need to activate the license of the installed
application. Some applications may not have a license. This feature is also
available from the machine (see "Application Management" on page 296)
•
Backup/Restore: You can backup the machine’s configurations and restore
the configuration when there is a problem with the machine. The saved
(backed up) files can also be used to configure other machines.
•
Contact Information: You can view contact information. To change the
information, (see "Contact Information" on page 305).
•
Link : You can view links to useful websites where you can:
-
view product information and get support (samsung website).
-
download manuals and drivers.
-
order consumable supplies.
-
register your machine on-line.
8. Management tools
164
Easy Capture Manager
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard. Now you can easily print your captured screen as
captured or edited.
8. Management tools
165
Samsung AnyWeb Print
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
8. Management tools
166
Easy Eco Driver
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1 Open a document to print.
2 Open printing preference window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
3 From the Favorites tab, select Eco Printing Preview.
4 Click OK > Print in the window. A preview window appears.
5 Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
6 Click Print.
If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print, check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference
window.
8. Management tools
167
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features mentioned below:
•
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or multiple pictures.
•
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
•
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
•
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
•
SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
•
E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents asone
E-Book or convert existing files into an E-Book format.
•
Plug-in: Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program.
Click the Help (
) button from the window and then click on any option
you want to know about.
8. Management tools
168
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
• Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.
• For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
11
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Printer list
1
The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer
and network printers added by network discovery (Windows
only).
For Mac,
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
8. Management tools
169
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Printer
This area gives you general information about your machine.
information You can check information, such as the machine’s model
name, IP address (or Port name), and machine status.
5
6
You can view the online User’s Guide.
2
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs. You
can directly open the necessary section in the user’s
guide.
Application Includes links for changing to the advanced settings(switching
information UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help, and about.
3
The
button is used to change the user interface to
the advanced settings user interface (see "Advanced
settings user interface overview" on page 170).
Quick links
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
4
Contents
area
Displays information about the selected machine, remaining
toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the
machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature.
Order
supplies
Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window.
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
12
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Device Settings
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
8. Management tools
170
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
•
Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device settings.
•
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
•
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
•
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
8. Management tools
171
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
machine status.
• The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Icon
Mean
Normal
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
Warning
The machine is in a state where an error might occur
in the future. For example, it might be in toner low
status, which may lead to toner empty status.
Error
The machine has at least one error.
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "System requirements" on page 257).
• Available for Windows OS users only.
Description
13
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
8. Management tools
172
Using Samsung Printer Status
User’s Guide
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
1
Supplies
Information
You can view the percentage of toner remaining in
each toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
Option
You can set printing job alert related settings.
Order Supplies
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
Cancel Print
• If print job is waiting in the print queue or printer,
cancel all user's print jobs in the print queue or the
printer.
2
3
4
or
5
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Close
• Depending on the status of the machine or the
supported functions, the Close button may appear
to close the status window.
8. Management tools
173
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
Available for Windows 8 users only.
14
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
) tile.
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
Printer Information
1
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
8. Management tools
174
Using Samsung Printer Experience
15
User Guide
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
2
Order Supplies
3
4
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
Visit Samsung
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
Printer Settings
You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation,
networking, and print information through
SyncThru™ Web Service. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network. This button will be disabled
if your machine is connected via USB cable.
5
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
Select Add Printer
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
Device List & Latest
Scanned Image
6
The scan list displays devices that supports
Samsung Printer Experience. Under the device,
you can see the latest scanned images. Your
machine needs to be connected to a network to scan
from here. This section is for the users with multifunctional printers.
If you see
mark, you can also click
mark to add printers.
8. Management tools
175
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Deleting a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
4
5
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
4
Select Remove Printer.
Select the printer you want to delete.
Click Yes.
You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen.
16
Printing from Windows 8
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
2
3
Open the document to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
8. Management tools
176
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Cancelling a print job
Basic tab
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
(Stop) button on the
control panel.
Opening more settings
Basic
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
Eco settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Click More settings.
8. Management tools
177
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Advanced tab
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that this features are not
supported.
Paper settings
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Layout settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
8. Management tools
178
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
17
Using the sharing feature
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications
installed on the computer using the sharing feature.
This feature is only available for printing jpeg, bmp, tiff, gif, and png file
formats.
1
2
3
4
Select the content you want to print from other application.
From the Charms, select Share > Samsung Printer Experience.
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
3
4
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
5
6
Click Prescan (
7
Click Scan (
Click the Print button to start the print job.
18
Click Scan (
).
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
) to check the image.
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
) and save the image.
Scanning from Windows 8
• When you place the originals in the ADF (or DSDF), Prescan (
) is not
available.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
• You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
8. Management tools
179
Using Box
19
20
Understanding the Box screen
Command keys
Documents and images printed, scanned, downloaded and sent from
computers can be stored in the Box. The Box is located on your machine’s hard
disk drive (HDD). It means the documents are stored on the HDD. You can create
a password for a certain Stored Document, so unauthorized users cannot access
it. Also, you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features
and send the documents to several destination such as email, server or fax. You
can set a Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru™
Web Service.
• If important data is stored in the Box, we recommend you to backup the
data regularly. Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of
data caused by misuse or failure of the machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
click on any option you want to know about.
(quick menu) and then
When you selected files, shows below meus.
•
(Print) : Print files directly.
•
(Send) : Send files to Fax, Email, Server, Box, or USB.
•
(Delete) : Delete folders and files.
Button
Name
Description
Quick Menu
Open the quick menu.
Search
Search for a desired menu or app.
View Mode
Select the view type.
My Program
Show my program list.
8. Management tools
180
Using Box
Button
Name
Sub menu (Action
overflow)
Description
Button
Open the sub menu.
Name
Description
Send
Manage the stored send data.
Download
Manage the stored download data.
USB
Use a USB memory.
• Select All : Select all folders and files.
• Print Options : Set options for printing.
• Create folder : Create a folder.
• Rename : Rename a folder or a file.
• Delete : Delete folders and files.
• Copy : Copy folders and files.
• Move : Move folders or files to other storage.
• Clear Browsing Info : Clear browsing
information.
Job progress
• Detail : View the detail information about a
folder or a file.
This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job.
• Filing Policy : Select a filing policy.
•
Detail : Tap this button to see the status, type, and time of the job.
• Format : Formatting files or data.
•
Preview Area : Allows you to see a preview of the document being saved.
The image in the Preview area indicates the current send settings, such as
the orientation and size of the file.
Storage
Button
Name
Description
Forward
Manage the forward data.
Print
Manage the stored print data.
8. Management tools
181
Using Box
3
4
21
Using Box
To use the Box feature, tap Box from the home screen or Apps.
Input the folder name and select Set as Private, and then tap OK.
the appropriate information in the ID, Password, Confirm Password
fields, and then tap OK.
Using multi check
This function is not available in Print and Send storage.
Touch and hold a folder or file, then change the multi check mode.
Create private folder
This function is not available in Download and USB storage.
•
Public: All users can access to the files.
•
Private: Set up the password to prevent unauthorized person from
accessing.
1
Select the type of Storage (Print or Send) in which you want to create
the folder.
2
Tap
> Create folder.
8. Management tools
182
9. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
• Redistributing toner
184
• Replacing the toner cartridge
186
• Replacing the waste toner container
189
• Clearing original document jams
191
• Tips for avoiding paper jams
197
• Clearing paper jams
198
• Understanding display messages
212
• Power and cable connecting problems
219
• Solving other problems
220
If you cannot solve problems using this chapter, contact your administrator or service center.
You can see the contact information from Settings > Contact Information > System
Administrator or Samsung Support. This information is configured by the machine’s
administrator.
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
White streaks or light printing occurs.
•
Toner low related message appears on the display.
•
The status LED blinks orange.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the
remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing
will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the
machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality
problems occur.
2
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
1
1
Click this link to open an animation about redistributing toner.
2
1
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
2
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
3
Thoroughly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
9. Troubleshooting
184
Redistributing toner
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing
in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
4
5
Close the front door. Ensure that the door is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside
the machine. Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
9. Troubleshooting
185
Replacing the toner cartridge
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one:
yellow(Y), magenta(M), cyan(C), and black(K).
1
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
When the toner cartridge is totally empty
•
The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message
of replacing toner.
•
The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory.
However, when the color toner cartridges are empty, but there is toner left
in the black toner cartridge, you can still print black-and-white print jobs
(the submitted job must be in black and white).
•
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Consumables
and accessories" on page 235).
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
2
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner
cartridge.(X422x/X425x/X430x/X40x series)
Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge.
(K425x/K430x/K435x/K40x series)
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
1
1
2
2
9. Troubleshooting
186
Replacing the toner cartridge
3
Remove the new toner cartridges from its bag.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing
in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
6
Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside
the machine. Insert it back into its slot until locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
4
Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
5
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Carefully pull the sealing tape out of the toner cartridge..
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
9. Troubleshooting
187
Replacing the toner cartridge
7
Close the front door. Ensure that the door is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
9. Troubleshooting
188
Replacing the waste toner container
When the life of the waste toner container expires totally, the display screen
shows the error message of replacing waste toner container.
2
At this stage, the waste toner container needs to be replaced.
•
Push the left/right locking levers and push outward as shown below.
Then remove the waste toner container.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Check the type of the waste toner container for your machine (see
"Consumables and accessories" on page 235).
1
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
3
4
Remove the new waste toner container from its package.
Insert the new waste toner container until it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
9. Troubleshooting
189
Replacing the waste toner container
5
Close the front door. Ensure that the door is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
9. Troubleshooting
190
Clearing original document jams
When an original jams while passing through the dual scan document feeder
(DSDF), a warning message appears on the display screen.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and
gently.
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the DSDF.
Open the DSDF cover.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or mixed
paper-type originals.
9. Troubleshooting
191
Clearing original document jams
3
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DSDF.
4
Close the DSDF cover.
9. Troubleshooting
192
Clearing original document jams
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the DSDF.
3
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DSDF. If you can not grasp
the jammed paper, use lever as shown in the picture below.
Open the DSDF cover.
9. Troubleshooting
193
Clearing original document jams
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
4
5
Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DSDF.
Open the DSDF input tray.
9. Troubleshooting
194
Clearing original document jams
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
6
7
Close DSDF cover and DSDF input tray.
Open the DSDF.
8
Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it using both hands.
9. Troubleshooting
195
Clearing original document jams
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
9
Close the DSDF.
9. Troubleshooting
196
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a
paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines.
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 46).
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
•
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
•
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
•
Do not mix paper types in a tray.
•
Use only recommended print media (see "Tray Settings" on page 59).
•
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray,
or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
9. Troubleshooting
197
Clearing paper jams
When a paper jam occurs, a warning message appears on the display screen.
1
Open the right door.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.
3
1
Paper jam in tray 1, 2
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
2
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
9. Troubleshooting
198
Clearing paper jams
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Pull out tray 1 or 2.
Close the right door.
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
9. Troubleshooting
199
Clearing paper jams
4
Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
4
Paper jam in tray 3, 4
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1
5
Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder.
Insert tray 1 or 2 back into the machine until it locks into place. Printing
automatically resumes.
9. Troubleshooting
200
Clearing paper jams
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Pull out tray 3 or 4.
Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
9. Troubleshooting
201
Clearing paper jams
4
Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
5
Paper jam in the multi-purpose tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
5
1
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2
Open and close the front door to resume printing.
Insert tray 3 or 4 back into the machine until it locks into place. Printing
automatically resumes.
9. Troubleshooting
202
Clearing paper jams
6
Paper jam inside the machine (Jam feed 1, Jam feed 2)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Close the right door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1
Open the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
203
Clearing paper jams
7
Paper jam inside the machine (Jam feed 3, Jam feed 4)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1
Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder.
9. Troubleshooting
204
Clearing paper jams
8
Paper jam inside the machine (Jam Registration)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Close the right door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1
Open the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
205
Clearing paper jams
9
Paper jam inside of the machine (Jam at Fuser out)
2
Open the fuser cover. Then remove the jammed paper by gently pulling
it straight out.
3
Close the fuser cover and the right door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1
Open the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
206
Clearing paper jams
10
Paper jam at the top of duplex path (Jam Duplex
Return, Jam Duplex 1)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Close the right door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1
Open the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
207
Clearing paper jams
11
Paper jam at the inside of duplex path (Jam Duplex 2)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Close the right door.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1
Open the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
208
Clearing paper jams
12
Paper jam bottom of duplex path (Jam Duplex Regi.)
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
2
1
Open the right door.
3
Close the right door.
1
2
9. Troubleshooting
209
Clearing paper jams
13
Paper jam in exit area (Jam Exit Face down)
If the optional Inner Finisher or booklet finisher is installed, remove the
jammed paper as shown below.
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1
Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
2
Open and close the front door. Printing automatically resumes.
9. Troubleshooting
210
Clearing paper jams
If this paper jam persists, make sure the bin full sensor is unfolded. The bin
full sensor is located in front of the output tray.
9. Troubleshooting
211
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the display screen to indicate the machine’s status or
errors. Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you troubleshoot
problem. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary. Messages and their
explanations are listed in alphabetical order.
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call for service.
• When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or
models.
Message
Meaning
Did not supply enough
toner. Remove seal tape
of toner cartridge or
shake it. Call for service if
the problem persists
The machine cannot
detect a toner
cartridge. Or not
removed seal tape of
toner cartridge.
Remove the sealing tape
from the toner cartridge.
Refer to Quick Install
Guide.
Door is open. Close it
The door is not
securely latched.
Close the door until it locks
into place.
End of life, Replace with
new imaging unit
The indicated imaging
unit has reached its
estimated imaging
Replace the imaging unit
with a Samsung-genuine
imaging unit.
unit lifea.
• [tray number] indicates the tray number.
The indicated toner
cartridge has reached
its estimated cartridge
• [media type] indicates the media type.
lifea.
• [color] indicates the color of toner or imaging unit.
• [media size] indicates the paper size.
Message
Meaning
Check whether the pieces There is a problem in
of paper remain in the
the paper path.
paper path
End of life, Replace with
new toner cartridge
Engine System Failure
[error number]:Turn off
then on
• [error number] indicates the error number.
Replace the toner
cartridge with a Samsungg
enuine toner cartridgeb
(see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 186).
There is a problem in
the engine system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Fuser Unit Failure [error There is a problem in
number]:Turn off then on the fuser unit.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Suggested solutions
Remove the pieces of
paper remain in the paper
path. If the problem
persists, call for service.
Suggested solutions
Fuser Failure [error
number]:Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists.
9. Troubleshooting
212
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
[HCF number] cassette is
pulled out. Insert it
properly
The HCF is not securely
latched.
Close the HCF until it locks
into place.
HCF [number] door is
open. Close it
The HCF door is not
securely latched.
Close the HCF door until it
locks into place.
[HCF number] is not
installed. Install the tray
The HCF is not properly
installed.
Reinstall the HCF. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
HDD System Failure
[error number]:Turn off
then on. Call for service if
the problem persists
There is a problem in
the hard disk.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
HDD System Failure
[error number]: Call for
service
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Imaging unit Failure:
[error number]. Please
turn off then on
There is a problem in
the imaging unit.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Imaging unit is not
compatible. Check users
guide
The imaging unit you
have installed is not for
your machine.
Install a Samsung-genuine
imaging unit, designed for
your machine (see
"Available Consumables"
on page 237).
Imaging unit is not
installed. Install the unit
The imaging unit is not
installed or the
imaging unit is not
properly installed.
Install the imaging unit. If
it is already installed, try to
reinstall the imaging unit.
If the problem persists, call
for service.
Install toner cartridge
The toner cartridge is
not installed or the
toner cartridge is not
properly installed.
Install the toner cartridge.
If it is already installed, try
to reinstall the toner
cartridge. If the problem
persists, call for service.
HDD Error [Error
number]. Check users
guide
Imaging Unit Failure:
[error number]. Install
imaging unit again
The imaging unit is not
installed.
Install the imaging unit. If
it is already installed, try to
reinstall the imaging unit.
If the problem persists, call
for service.
Input System Failure
[error number]:Check
[HCF number]
connection
There is a problem in
the HCF
Open and close the HCF. If
the problem persists, call
for service.
Imaging unit Failure:
[error number]. Call for
service
There is a problem in
the imaging unit.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Input System Failure
[error number]:Check
[tray number]
connection
There is a problem in
the tray
Open and close the tray. If
the problem persists, call
for service.
9. Troubleshooting
213
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Input System Failure
There is a problem in
[error number]:Pull [HCF the HCF.
number] out and insert it
Open and close the HCF. If
the problem persists, call
for service.
MSOK Failure [error
number]. Call for service
There is a problem in
the engine system.
There is a problem in
Input System Failure
[error number]:Pull [tray the tray.
number] out and insert it
Open and close the tray. If
the problem persists, call
for service.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Network cable is
disconnected. Check it
Lamp Failure: [error
number]. Open the door,
then close it. Call for
service if the problem
persists
There is a problem in
the lamp.
Open the door, then close
it. If the problem persists,
call for service.
The machine is not
connected with a
network cable.
Connect the machine to
the network with a
network cable.
Original paper jam in the
exit area of scanner
The originals are
jammed in Dual scan
document feeder.
Clear the jam.
Load [tray number] with
[Letter], [Plain] paper
Thepapersize specified
in the printer
properties does not
match the paper you
are loading.
Load the correct paper in
the tray.
Original paper jam inside
the scanner
The originals are
jammed in Dual scan
document feeder.
Clear the jam (see
"Original paper jam inside
of scanner" on page 193 or
).
The output tray is full.
LSU Failure: [error
number]. Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists
There is a problem in
the LSU.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Paper in all output bins is
full. Remove printed
paper
Remove papers from the
output tray, the machine
resumes printing.
Paper in output bin is full. The output tray is full.
Remove printed paper
Remove papers from the
output tray, the machine
resumes printing.
Motor Failure: [error
number]. Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists
There is a problem in
the motor system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Paper is empty in [HCF
number]. Load paper
There is no paper in the
HCF.
Load paper in the HCF.
Paper is empty in [tray
number]. Load paper
There is no paper in the
tray.
Load paper in the tray.
MSOK Failure [error
number]. Call for service
and Change MSOK
There is a problem in
the engine system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Paper is low in [HCF
number]. Load paper
Running out of paper
in the HCF.
Load paper in the HCF.
Paper is low in [tray
number]. Load paper
Running out of paper
in the tray.
Load paper in the tray.
9. Troubleshooting
214
Understanding display messages
Message
Paper Jam at the bottom
of duplex path
Paper Jam at the top of
duplex path
Paper Jam in exit area
Paper Jam inside of
machine
Paper Jam in HCF [tray
number]
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "Paper
during duplex printing. jam bottom of duplex path
(Jam Duplex Regi.)" on
page 209).
Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "Paper
during duplex printing. jam at the top of duplex
path (Jam Duplex Return,
Jam Duplex 1)" on page
207).
Paper has jammed in
the exit area.
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in exit area (Jam Exit
Face down)" on page 210 .)
Paper has jammed
inside of the machine.
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam inside the machine
(Jam feed 1, Jam feed 2)"
on page 203 or "Paper jam
inside the machine (Jam
feed 3, Jam feed 4)" on
page 204.
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
HCF.
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in tray 3, 4" on page
200).
Message
Paper jam in tray 1
Meaning
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Suggested solutions
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in tray 1, 2" on page
198).
Paper jam in Tray 2
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in tray 1, 2" on page
198).
Paper jam in Tray 3
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in tray 3, 4" on page
200 ).
Paper jam in Tray 4
Clear the jam.
Paper jam in [tray
number] or tray door is
open
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray or tray door is
open.
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in tray 1, 2" on page
198) or close the tray.
Paper jam in MP tray
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Clear the jam.
Paper jam or paper
empty in tray
Paper has jammed in
the tray or there is no
paper.
Clear the jam (see "Paper
jam in the multi-purpose
tray" on page 202) or load
paper.
PPM data is incorrect.
Call for service & change
MSOK
There is a problem in
the ppm data.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Prepare new imaging
unit
The estimated lifea of
the imaging unit is
close.
Prepare a new imaging
unit for a replacement.
9. Troubleshooting
215
Understanding display messages
Message
Prepare new toner
cartridge
Replace with new toner
cartridge
Meaning
The estimated
cartridge lifea of toner
is close.
The indicated toner
cartridge has almost
reached its estimated
cartridge lifea.
Replace with new
imaging unit
The indicated imaging
unit has almost
reached its estimated
imaging unit lifea.
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Prepare a new cartridge
for a replacement. You
may temporarily increase
the printing quality by
redistributing the toner
(see "Redistributing toner"
on page 184).
Replace with new fuser
unit
The life of the fuser unit
expires totally.
Replace the fuser unit with
a Samsung-genuine fuser
unit, call for service.
Replace with new
Transfer roller
The life of the transfer
roller expires totally.
Replace the transfer roller
with a Samsung-genuine
transfer roller, call for
service.
Replace the toner
cartridge for the best print
quality when this message
appears. Using a cartridge
beyond this stage can
result in printing quality
issues (see "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page
186).
Replace with new [tray
number] pickup roller
The life of the tray
pickup roller expires
totally.
Replace the tray pickup
roller with a Samsunggenuine pickup roller, call
for service.
Scanner locked or
another problem
occurred
The CCD (Charged
Couple Device) lock
has been locked.
Unlock the CCD lock . Or
turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
If the machine stops
printing, replace the toner
cartridge (see "Replacing
the toner cartridge" on
page 186).
Scan System Failure
[error number]:Turn off
then on
There is a problem in
the scan system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Sensor Failure: [error
number]. Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists
There is a problem in
the sensor system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Replace the imaging unit
for the best print quality
when this message
appears. Using a imaging
unit beyond this stage can
result in printing quality
issues.
9. Troubleshooting
216
Understanding display messages
Message
Shake [color] toner
cartridge
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Small amount of toner
is left in the indicated
cartridge.
• You may temporarily
increase the printing
quality by
redistributing the toner
(see "Redistributing
toner" on page 184).
Toner cartridge is not
compatible. Check users
guide
The imaging unit you
have installed is not for
your machine.
Install a Samsung-genuine
imaging unit, designed for
your machine (see
"Available Consumables"
on page 237).
TR Failure: [error
number]. Install transfer
roller again
The transfer roller is
not installed.
Install the transfer roller. If
it is already installed, try to
reinstall the transfer roller.
If the problem persists, call
for service.
Tray failure [error
number]. Check Tray
connection
The tray is not securely
connected.
Reinstall the tray. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
Tray failure [error
number]. Pull [tray
number] out and insert it.
Call for service if the
problem persists
The tray is not securely
connected.
Reinstall the tray. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
[tray number] is not
installed. Install the tray
The tray is not properly
installed.
Reinstall the tray. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
[tray number] cassette is
pulled out. Insert it
properly
The tray is not securely
latched.
Close the tray until it locks
into place.
[tray number] door is
open. Close it
The tray door is not
securely latched.
Close the tray door until it
locks into place.
• If the problem persists,
call for service.
The clock became initial
time. Set a time again
The time setting of
machine is initialized.
Set the time setting in
Machine Setup.
The IPv4 address
assigned to wireless LAN
conflicts with that of
other system. Check it
The IPv4 address is
used
elsewhere(wieless
LAN).
Check the IPv4 address or
obtain a new IP address.
The IPv6 address
assigned to wireless LAN
conflicts with that of
other system. Check it
The IPv6 address is
used
elsewhere(wieless
LAN).
Check the IPv6 address or
obtain a new IP address.
The room temperature is
not suitable for this set
use. Please adjust room
temperature
The machine is in a
room with improper
room temperature.
Please adjust room
temperature (see
"Adjustment" on page
287).
This IP address conflicts
The IP address is used
with that of other system. elsewhere.
Check it
Check the IP address or
obtain a new IP address.
Toner Cartridge Failure:
[error number]. Call for
service
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
There is a problem in
the toner cartridge.
9. Troubleshooting
217
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
UI System Failure: [error
number]. Call for service
There is a problem in
the UI system.
Turn the machine off and
back on again. If the
problem persists, call for
service.
802.1x authentication
failed. Please Contact the
System Administrator
Fail to authenticate.
Check the network
authentication protocol. If
the problem persists, call
for service.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge, which indicates the
average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of
pages may be affected by the percentage of image area, operating environment, printing
interval, media type and media size.
b. When the toner cartridge has reached its end of life, the machine will stop printing. In this case,
you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru™Web Service. (Settings >
Machine Settings > System > Setup > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge Stop) or
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > System > Supplies Management >
Toner Cartridge Stop). Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the
device's system.
9. Troubleshooting
218
Power and cable connecting problems
Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems.
Condition
The machine is not receiving power, or the connection
cable between the computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Suggested solutions
• Plug in the power cord and turn on the power switch (see "Turning on the machine" on page 22).
• Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Connecting a network cable" on page 21).
9. Troubleshooting
219
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
15
Paper feeding problems
Other problems include:
Condition
Suggested solutions
•
See "Display screen problem" on page 220.
•
See "Paper feeding problems" on page 220.
Paper jams during
printing.
Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on
page 198).
•
See "Printing problems" on page 221.
Paper sticks together.
•
See "Printing quality problems" on page 224.
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray (see
"Print media specifications" on page 254).
•
See "Copying problems" on page 228.
•
See "Scanning problems" on page 229.
•
See "Fax problems (optional)" on page 230.
•
See "Operating system problems" on page 231.
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of
paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the
paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick
together. Try a fresh ream of paper.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.
14
Display screen problem
Condition
The display screen does
not show anything.
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray.
Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the
paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 198).
Suggested solutions
• Adjusts the brightness of the display screen.
• Turn the machine off and back on again. If the
problem persists, call for service.
9. Troubleshooting
220
Solving other problems
16
Condition
Paper does not feed
into the machine.
Suggested solutions
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess
paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets
the specifications required by the machine (see
"Print media specifications" on page 254).
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the
DSDF rubber pad may require to be replaced.
Contact a service representative.
The paper keeps
jamming.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess
paper from the tray. If you are printing on special
materials, use the multi-purpose tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper
that meets the specifications required by the machine
(see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the
front door and remove any debris.
• If an original does not feed into the machine, the
DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced.
Contact a service representative.
Envelopes skew or fail
to feed correctly.
Printing problems
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of
the envelopes.
Condition
Possible cause
The machine
The machine is not
does not print. receiving power.
The machine is not
selected as the default
machine.
Suggested solutions
Check the power cord connections.
Check the power switch and the
power source.
Select your machine as your default
machine in your Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The front door is not closed. Close the front door.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 198).
• No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the
tray" on page 46).
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed.
Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit.
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and
reconnect it.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable to
another computer that is working
properly and print a job. You can
also try using a different machine
cable.
9. Troubleshooting
221
Solving other problems
Condition
Possible cause
The machine
The port setting is
does not print. incorrect.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong
paper source.
Suggested solutions
Check the Windows printer setting
to make sure that the print job is
sent to the correct port. If the
computer has more than one port,
make sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may be
configured incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences to
ensure that all of the print settings
are correct (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 65).
The printer driver may be
incorrectly installed.
Repair the machine software.
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the
control panel to see if the machine
is indicating a system error. Contact
a service representative.
The document size is so
big that the hard disk
space of the computer is
insufficient to access the
print job.
If printing GUI, make more hard disk
space available for your print job
and try printing the document
again.
The paper option that
was selected in the
Printing Preferences
may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the
paper source selection is found
under the Paper tab within the
Printing Preferences. Select the
correct paper source. See the
printer driver help screen (see
"Opening printing preferences" on
page 65).
Condition
Possible cause
A print job is
extremely
slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Half the page
is blank.
The page orientation
Change the page orientation in
setting may be incorrect. your application. See the printer
driver help screen.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
Suggested solutions
Reduce the complexity of the page
or try adjusting the print quality
settings.
The paper size and the
paper size settings do
not match.
Ensure that the paper size in the
printer driver settings matches the
paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the
paper size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.
The machine cable is
loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and
reconnect. Try a print job that you
have already printed successfully. If
possible, attach the cable and the
machine to another computer that
you know works and try a print job.
Finally, try a new machine cable.
The wrong printer driver
was selected.
Check the application’s printer
selection menu to ensure that your
machine is selected.
The software application
is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another
application.
The operating system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine off
and back on again.
If you are in a DOS
environment, the font
setting for your machine
may be set incorrectly.
Change the language setting.
9. Troubleshooting
222
Solving other problems
Condition
Pages print,
but they are
blank.
The machine
does not print
PDF file
correctly.
Some parts of
graphics, text,
or illustrations
are missing.
The print
quality of
photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The toner cartridge is
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
defective or out of toner. If necessary, replace the toner
cartridge.
The file may have blank
pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does
not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the
controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
Incompatibility between
the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image
may enable the file to print. Turn on
Print As Image from the Acrobat
printing options.
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Before
printing, the
machine emits
vapor near the
output tray.
Using damp paper can
cause vapor during
printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep
printing. Try a fresh ream of paper.
The machine
does not print
special- sized
paper, such as
billing paper.
Paper size and paper size
setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the
Custom Paper List in the Paper tab
in the Printing Preferences (see
"Paper Options" on page 67).
Your machine
has an odd
smell during
initial use.
The oil used to protect
the fuser is evaporating.
After printing about 100 color
pages, there will be no more smell.
It is a temporary issue.
It will take longer to print
when you print a PDF file as
an image.
If the PDF file do not
include the font or do
have the object which is
set on Interactive mode.
Try printing a job from Printer
Driver.
The resolution of the
photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the resolution
will be reduced.
9. Troubleshooting
223
Solving other problems
17
Condition
Printing quality problems
Toner specks
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there
might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition
Light or faded
print
• The color tone might not be adjusted. Adjust the color
tone.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example,
the paper may be too moist or rough (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the
paper may be too moist or rough (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your
machine. Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service
representative.
Suggested Solutions
• If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page,
the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily
extend the toner cartridge life. If this does not improve the
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.
Suggested Solutions
• Check the location of the machine. If the area is not wellventilated, this problem may occur.
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the
page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting
the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper
has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of
paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too
low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print
resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help
screen of the printer driver.
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can
cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or
brand of paper.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate
that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Contact a service
representative.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to thick paper
(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be
dirty. Clean the LSU, contact a service representative.
• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service
representative.
9. Troubleshooting
224
Solving other problems
Condition
White Spots
Vertical lines
Suggested Solutions
If white spots appear on the page:
Toner smear
Suggested Solutions
If toner smears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to
the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Cleaning
the inside or contact a service representative.
• Clean the inside of the machine. Cleaning the inside or
contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Cleaning the inside or
contact a service representative.
• Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative.
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan.
Contact a service representative.
• The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched.
Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative.
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be
dirty. Cleaning the inside or contact a service
representative.
If vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be
dirty. Cleaning the inside or contact a service
representative.
Color or Black
background
Condition
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
Vertical
repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at
even intervals:
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a repetitive mark
occurs on the page, run a cleaning sheet through several
times to clean the imaging unit. Cleaning the inside. If you
still have the same problems, remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. Contact a service representative.
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the
defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will
likely correct itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service
representative.
• Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan.
Contact a service representative.
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions
(low humidity) or a high level of humidity (higher than
80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
9. Troubleshooting
225
Solving other problems
Condition
Background
scatter
A
Misformed
characters
Page skew
Suggested Solutions
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly
distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different
batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams
can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a
printed page, adjust the print resolution through your
software application or in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
Condition
Curl or wave
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature
and humidity can cause paper curl (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
the paper 180° in the tray.
Wrinkles or
creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
the paper 180° in the tray.
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow
images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different
paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 254).
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy
effect, the scanner unit may need service. Cleaning the
scan unit or contact a service representative.
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the
paper stack.
• Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door, dual
cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder
right bottom door is securely closed. If the bottom doors are
not completely closed, open and close the bottom doors.
Suggested Solutions
• Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door, dual
cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder
right bottom door is securely closed. If the bottom doors
are not completely closed, open and close the bottom
doors.
Back of
printouts are
dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative.
9. Troubleshooting
226
Solving other problems
Condition
Solid Color or
Black pages
A
Loose toner
Suggested Solutions
• The imaging unit may not be installed properly. Remove
the imaging unit and reinsert it.
A
Horizontal
stripes
• The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing.
Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative.
• Clean the inside of the machine. Cleaning the inside or
contact a service representative.
Suggested Solutions
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The imaging unit may be installed improperly. Remove the
imaging unit and reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove the imaging
unit and install a new one. Contact a service
representative.
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.
Contact a service representative.
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the
machine:
• Check the paper type and quality (see "Print media
specifications" on page 254).
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating
the paper 180° in the tray.
• Remove the imaging unit and install a new one. Contact a
service representative.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing
Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to thin paper
(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 65).
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.
Contact a service representative.
Character Voids
Condition
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that
should be solid black:
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper.
Remove the paper and turn it around.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications (see "Print
media specifications" on page 254).
An unknown
image
repetitively
appears on a
few sheets or
loose toner,
light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m
(3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print
quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the
correct altitude setting to your machine.
9. Troubleshooting
227
Solving other problems
18
Condition
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solution
Copies are too
light or too dark
Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps. You can adjust the
darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the
original contains faint markings or dark images (see
"Changing Darkness" on page 95).
Smears, lines,
• If the defects are on the original, tap Copy from the home
screen or Apps (see "Changing Darkness" on page 95).
marks, or spots
appear on copies. • If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit.
Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service
representative.
Copy image is
skewed.
Suggested solution
Frequent copy
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the tray.
Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/
paper jams occur.
adjust the paper guides, if necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining
in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than
expected before
running out of
toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines.
For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters,
books, or other documents that use more toner.
• The DSDF may be left open while copies are being made.
• The machine may be turned on and off frequently.
• Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass
or face up in the DSDF.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.
Contact a service representative.
Blank copies
print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or
face up in the DSDF.
Image rubs off
the copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new
package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine
for extended periods of time.
9. Troubleshooting
228
Solving other problems
19
Condition
Scanning problems
The unit scans very slowly.
Condition
The scanner does not work.
Suggested solutions
• Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
• There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Make sure that the machine cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured
correctly.
• Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the DSDF.
• Check that the machine cable is connected
properly.
Suggested solutions
Message appears on your
computer screen:
• Device can’t be set to the
H/W mode you want.
• Port is being used by
another program.
• Port is Disabled.
• Scanner is busy receiving
or printing data. When the
current job is completed,
try again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has failed.
• There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished.
• The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
• The machine cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up
properly.
• Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected
or the power may be off.
9. Troubleshooting
229
Solving other problems
20
condition
Fax problems (optional)
Faxes are not received
automatically.
condition
suggested solutions
The machine is not
working, there is no
display, or the buttons
are not working.
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
No dial tone sounds.
• Check that the phone line is properly connected.
• Find the optimal line for communication (see
"General fax settings" on page 138).
The numbers stored in
memory do not dial
correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory
correctly.
The original does not feed • Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you
are inserting it in correctly. Check that the
into the machine.
original is the right size, not too thick or thin.
• Make sure that the DSDF is firmly closed.
• The DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced.
Contact a service representative.
• The receiving mode should be set to fax.
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
• Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem
• Find the optimal line for communication. To
check that, see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu
(see "General fax settings" on page 138).
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to the
electrical outlet.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.
suggested solutions
The machine does not
send.
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the DSDF
or on the scanner glass.
• Check the recipient’s fax machine (if it has a
problem).
• Find the optimal line for communication. To
check that, see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu
(see "General fax settings" on page 138).
The incoming fax has
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be
faulty.
blank spaces or is of poorquality.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the
toner cartridge.
• Find the optimal line for communication. To
check that, see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu
(see "General fax settings" on page 138).
9. Troubleshooting
230
Solving other problems
21
condition
suggested solutions
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are
stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary
document jam.
There are lines on the
originals you sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
Cleaning the scan unit.
The machine dials a
number, but the
connection with the other
fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of
paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with
the other machine operator and ask her/him to
solve out the problem.
Faxes do not store in
memory.
There may not be enough memory space to store
the fax. If the display indicating the memory status
shows, delete any faxes you no longer need from
the memory, and then try to store the fax again.
Operating system problems
Common Windows problems
Condition
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or
on other pages, with a
small strip of text at the
top
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in
the user option setting.
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears during
installation.
Exit all software applications.
Remove all software from the
startup group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer
driver.
“General Protection Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot
Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error
occurred” message appear.
These messages may appear during
printing. Just keep waiting until the
machine finishes printing. If the
message appears in ready mode or
after printing has completed, check
the connection and/or whether an
error has occurred.
Samsung Printer Experience is not
shown when you click more settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not
installed. Download the app from
the Windows Store and install it.
9. Troubleshooting
231
Solving other problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Common Mac problems
Machine information is not displayed
when you click the device in the Devices
and Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click
the Ports tab.
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF
files correctly. Some parts of
graphics, text, or illustrations are
missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may
enable the file to print. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
(Control Panel > Devices and
Printers > Right-click on your
printer icon and select Printer
properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT,
uncheck them and select TCP/IP,
USB, or WSD.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer
for further information on Windows error messages.
It will take longer to print when you
print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed
normally during cover page
printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font while
printing the cover page. The English
alphabet and numbers are displayed
normally on the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac
with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in
your machine driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Mac error messages.
9. Troubleshooting
232
Solving other problems
Common Linux problems
Condition
Condition
Suggested solutions
There is no xsane nor simplescan application on my Linux
machine.
For some Linux distributions, there might be
no default scan application. To use scan
features, install one of scan applications
using download center supplied by the
OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu,
Install/Remove Software for openSUSE,
Software for Fedora).
Scanner can not be found via
network.
For some Linux distributions, strong firewall
is enabled and it may block our installer from
opening the necessary port for searching
network devices. In such a case, open the
snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the
firewall temporarily while using the device.
When printing more than one
copy, the second copy does not
print.
The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to
the problem in standard CUPS filter
'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters' package to
version 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is
a part of 'cups-filters' package).
Unchecking the collate option in
the Print Dialog does not work.
For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog
has an issue handling the collate option. As
workaround, set the default value of collate
option to False using the system's printing
utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the
Terminal program).
Suggested solutions
Printing always works with
duplex.
This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS
package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.15ubuntu2.2.
Printer is not added through
system's printing utility.
The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the
defect in 'system-config-printer' package of
the Debian 7 (http://bugs.debian.org/cgibin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian
bug tracking system). Please use another
way to add printer (CUPS WebUI for
example)
Paper size and orientation are
disabled in the Print Dialog
when opening text files.
The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's
related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19.
Please use other text editors like 'gedit'.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Linux error messages.
9. Troubleshooting
233
Solving other problems
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several
printer languages are used.
Problem
The PostScript
file cannot be
printed
Possible cause
Solution
The PostScript driver may • Install the PostScript driver.
not be installed correctly. • Print a configuration page and
verify that the PS version is
available for printing.
Problem
Possible cause
When printing a
document in
Mac with
Acrobat Reader
6.0 or higher,
colors print
incorrectly
The resolution setting in
the printer driver may
not be matched with the
one in Acrobat Reader.
Solution
Make sure that the resolution
setting in your printer driver
matches the one in Acrobat
Reader.
• If the problem persists, contact
a service representative.
Limit Check
Error report
prints
The print job was too
complex.
You might need to reduce the
complexity of the page or install
more memory.
A PostScript
error page
prints
The print job may not be
PostScript.
Make sure that the print job is a
PostScript job. Check to see
whether the software application
expected a setup or PostScript
header file to be sent to the
machine.
The optional
tray is not
selected in the
driver
The printer driver has not
been configured to
recognize the optional
tray.
Open the PostScript driver
properties, select the Device
Options tab, and set the tray
option.
9. Troubleshooting
234
10. Consumables and
accessories
This guide provides information on purchasing Consumables, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
This chapter includes:
• Ordering supplies and accessories
236
• Available Consumables
237
• Precautions
239
• Available accessories
240
• Available maintenance parts
242
• Installing accessories
243
• Checking replaceable’s lifespan
245
• Using a USB Drive device
246
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to
obtain the list of available accessories.
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
• See "Available Consumables" on page 237.
• See "Available accessories" on page 240.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
10. Consumables and accessories
236
Available Consumables
When Consumables reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of Consumables for your machine.
1
K425x series/K430x series/K435x series
Average yielda
Type
Toner cartridge
Waste toner container
Part name
Average continuous black cartridge yield: 25,000 standard
pages
MLT-D708S (Black)
Average continuous black cartridge yield: 35,000 standard
pages
MLT-D708L (Black)
Approx. 100,000 pages
MLT-W708
a. Declared yield value in accordance with 6% coverage.
10. Consumables and accessories
237
Available Consumables
2
X422x series/X425x series/X430x series
Average yielda
Type
Toner cartridge
Part name
Average continuous black cartridge yield: 23,000 pages
CLT-K808S (Black)
Average continuous colored cartridge yield: 20,000 pages
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
CLT-C808S (Cyan)
CLT-M808S (Magenta)
CLT-Y808S (Yellow)
Waste toner container
Approx. 33,700 pages
CLT-W808
a. Declared yield value in accordance with 5% coverage.
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner
cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific
country conditions.
You must purchase Consumables, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, Consumables will be incompatible
with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country.
10. Consumables and accessories
238
Precautions
•
Disconnect the power cord.
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity.
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal
accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power
source. If you walk around before finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.
•
Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties.
After installing an accessory such as an optional tray, PS driver users must do the additional setting. Go to the PS printer properties and set the added accessory
activated.
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service component. Do not change it by yourself.
There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to the instructions.
10. Consumables and accessories
239
Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
Accessory
function
Part name
Cabinet Stand
You can place the machine on the ergonomically-designed cabinet
which lets you reach the machine conveniently. Also, you can easily
move the cabinet with its wheels, if necessary, and store
miscellaneous items like papers into the cabinet.
CLX-DSK502T
Dual Cassette Feeder
If you are experiencing frequent Paper Source problems, you can
attach an additional tray. The optional tray can hold up to 1,040
sheets. You can print documents in various sizes and types of print
materials in the tray.
CLX-PFP502D
Working Table
You can place an external authentication device or miscellaneous
items on the working table.
CLX-WKT000
Fax Kit
This fax kit allows you to use your machine as a fax.
CLX-FAX160
Fax Multiline Kit
This fax multiline kit allows you to use the second fax line.
SL-FAX2501
FDI(Foreign Device Interface) Kit
This card is installed inside the machine to allow a third party device
such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow
the payfor-print service on your machine.
CLX-KIT10F
Job Separator
This Job separator will help the machine to collate printouts.
SL-JSP500S
Finisher
This Finisher allows you to sort, group and staple printouts.
SL-FIN501L
Booklet Finisher
This booklet finisher allows you to fold, sort, group, staple and make
booklets with printouts.
SL-FIN702B : X422x/X425x/X430x series
SL-WKT101
SL-FIN703B : K425x/K430x/K435x series
10. Consumables and accessories
240
Available accessories
Accessory
function
Part name
High-volume Finisher
This High-volume Finisher allows you to sort, group, and staple high- SL-FIN702H : X422x/X425x/X430x series
volume printouts.
SL-FIN703H : K425x/K430x/K435x series
Hole Punch Kit (Finisher)
This kit allows you to punch holes for filing the printouts.
SL-HPU501x
Hole Punch Kit (Booklet Finisher,
High-volume Finisher)
This kit allows you to punch holes for filing the printouts.
SL-HPU701x
Staple Cartridge (Inner Finisher/
Booklet Staples)
3 x 5,000 staples per package, covers maximum thickness of 50
sheets, 1 staple position.
SCX-STP000
Wireless/NFC Kit
To purchase the Wireless/NFC kit, contact the retailer or distributor
where you purchased the machine. Only authorized service
providers, distributors, or retailers are permitted to install the
Wireless/NFC kit.
SL-NWE001X
Additional Network Kit
This Additional Network Kit allows you to use the second Network
line.
SL-NWA001N
10. Consumables and accessories
241
Available maintenance parts
You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems
resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the
model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase
maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the "Samsung Printer
Status" program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating
system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity.
10. Consumables and accessories
242
Installing accessories
3
4
Precautions
•
Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
Setting Device Options
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to
the instructions.
3
4
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Right-click your machine.
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context
menus, select the Printer properties.
10. Consumables and accessories
243
Installing accessories
•
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
5
Select Device Options.
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
6
•
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
•
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
•
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
•
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
-
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
-
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
Select the appropriate option.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
•
7
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
10. Consumables and accessories
244
Checking replaceable’s lifespan
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
remaining lifespan of Consumables. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
1
2
Tap Settings > Management > Supplies Life from the main screen.
Check the consumables life.
10. Consumables and accessories
245
Using a USB Drive device
This chapter explains how to use a USB Drive device with your machine.
You must use only an authorized USB Drive device with an A plug type
connector.
5
Understanding the USB screen
A
B
To use the USB feature, tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
Documents and images printed, scanned, downloaded and sent from USB can
be stored in the Box (see "Using Box" on page 180).
Use only a USB Drive device with metal-shielded connector.
6
About USB Drive device
USB Drive devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you
more room for storing documents, presentations, music and videos, high
resolution photographs, or whatever other files you want to store or move.
Only use a USB Drive device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB Drive device:
•
Scan documents and save them on a USB Drive device.
•
Print data stored on a USB Drive device.
•
Format the USB Drive device.
Your machine supports USB Drive devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of
512 bytes.
Check your USB Drive device’s file system from your dealer.
10. Consumables and accessories
246
Using a USB Drive device
7
Do not insert the USB Drive device to other ports except the ports which is
as shown below the image. If you insert the USB Drive device to other ports,
the machine shows warning message on the display screen.
Printing from a USB Drive device
You can directly print files stored on a USB Drive device. You can print TIFF, JPEG
and PRN files.
USB print option supported file types:
•
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible. PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box
when you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed
directly from USB Drive device (see "Printing to a file (PRN)" on page 87).
•
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
•
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
•
PDF: PDF 1.7 and below
In case of 8bit CMYK JPEG files, Job could be cancelled.
• Do not remove the USB Drive device while it is in use. The machine
warranty does not cover damage caused by a user’s misuse.
To print a document from a USB Drive device:
• If your USB Drive device has certain features, such as security settings and
password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For
details about these features, see USB Drive device’s User’s Guide.
10. Consumables and accessories
247
Using a USB Drive device
1
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
5
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on
it (see "About USB Drive device" on page 246).
• The machine cannot detect the unformatted USB Drive device. Format,
and then reinsert the USB Drive device into the USB port on your
machine.
• If the machine did not detect your USB Drive when themachine is in
power save mode. Wake up the device and wait until the machine
returns to ready state. Then reinsert the USB Drive back into the USB port
on the front of your device.
2
3
Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device.
Touch and hold folder or document you want to print from the list.
If the PDF file you selected is secured with a password, you have to know the
password for printing. Enter the password when the machine requires the
secure password. If you do not know the password, the print job will be
cancelled.
4
Tap
6
7
Select the appropriate option.
•
Copies: Selects the number of copies.
•
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used.
•
Auto fit: Allows you to scale your print job to the selected paper size
in the tray regardless of the document size. Select a tray, and press
On.
Tap
icon to begin printing.
After printing is completed, you can remove the USB Drive device from
the machine.
8
Managing USB Drive device
You can delete image files stored on a USB Drive one-by-one or all at once by
reformatting the device.
After deleting files or reformatting a USB Drive device, files cannot be
restored. Confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it.
> Print > Print Options.
10. Consumables and accessories
248
Using a USB Drive device
Deleting an image file
If the file is in a folder, press the folder name.
1
2
3
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device.
4
5
Tap
> Format.
Tap Format when the confirmation window appears.
Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list.
If the file is in a folder, press the folder name.
4
5
Tap
> Delete.
Tap Delete when the confirmation window appears.
Formatting a USB Drive device
1
2
3
Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine.
Tap Box > USB from the home screen or Apps.
The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device.
Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list.
10. Consumables and accessories
249
11. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
• Specifications
251
• Regulatory information
261
• Copyright
272
Specifications
1
Hardware specifications
Item
Dimension
Weight
K425x series
Height (with Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder)
829 mm (32.6 inches)
Depth
640 mm (25.2 inches)
Width
566 mm (22.3 inches)
Machine without consumables and
options
62 Kg (136.6 lbs)
K430x series
K435x series
X422x series
X425x series
X430x series
829 mm (32.6 inches)
879 mm (35.3 inches)
879 mm (35.3 inches)
63 Kg (138.9 lbs)
80 Kg (176.4 lbs)
80 Kg (176.4 lbs)
11. Appendix
251
Specifications
2
Environmental specifications
Item
Noise Levelab
Temperature
Humidity
K425x series
K430x series
K435x series
X422x series
X425x series
X430x series
Ready mode
30 dB(A)
Printing mode (Simplex)
• Tray 1: 50dB(A)
• Tray 1: 51dB(A)
• Tray 1: 52dB(A) • Tray 1: 48dB(A) • Tray 1: 49dB(A) • Tray 1: 50dB(A)
(Duplex: Simplex+2dBA)
• MP : 52dB(A)
• MP : 53dB(A)
• MP : 54 dB(A)
• MP : 50 dB(A)
• MP : 51dB(A)
• MP : 52 dB(A)
• Option tray :
52dB(A)
• Option tray :
53dB(A)
• Option tray :
54dB(A)
• Option tray :
50dB(A)
• Option tray :
51dB(A)
• Option tray :
52dB(A)
Copying mode (Simplex)
• Tray 1: 53dB(A)
• Tray 1: 55dB(A)
• Tray 1: 55dB(A) • Tray 1: 53dB(A) • Tray 1: 54dB(A) • Tray 1: 54dB(A)
(Duplex: Simplex+2dBA)
• MP : 55 dB(A)
• MP : 57 dB(A)
• MP : 57 dB(A)
• MP : 55 dB(A)
• MP : 56dB(A)
• MP : 56dB(A)
• Option tray :
55dB(A)
• Option tray :
57dB(A)
• Option tray :
57dB(A)
• Option tray :
55dB(A)
• Option tray :
56dB(A)
• Option tray :
56dB(A)
Operation
10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Storage
-20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Operation
20 to 80% RH
Storage
10 to 90% RH
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
b. China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A), the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice.
11. Appendix
252
Specifications
3
Electrical specifications
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the
product warranty.
Item
Power ratinga
Power consumptionb
Description
110 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models
AC 220 - 240 V
Average operating mode
Less than 1,200 W
Ready mode
Less than 250 W
Power save mode
Less than 1.5 W
Power off mode
Less than 0 W
a. see the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz), and type of current for your machine.
b. The power consumption may be affected by the machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment, and measuring equipment and method the country uses.
11. Appendix
253
Specifications
4
Print media specifications
Type
Plain paper
Size
Dimensions
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
Ledger
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A3
297 x 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.7 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
B4
257 x 364 mm (10.1 x 14.3 inches)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
ISO B5
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
US Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
Oficio
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
8K
270 x 390 mm (10.75 x 15.5 inches)
16K
195 x 270 mm (7.76 x 10.75 inches)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
print media weight/Capacity (Simplex)a
tray1,2,3,4
multipurpose tray
71 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond)
71 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb bond)
• 520 sheets of 80g/m2 (20 lb bond)
for each tray
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
A3, Ledger and 8K are not
supported in Tray1.
Not available in tray1,2,3,4
11. Appendix
254
Specifications
Type
Envelope
Size
Dimensions
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
Envelope Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope No. 9
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
Envelope DL
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
Envelope C6
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Envelope C4
229 x 324 mm (9.01 x 12.75 inches)
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Heavy weight
paper
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Extra Heavy
weight
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Thin paper
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Colored / PrePrinted
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Recycled
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Thick paper
Cotton
print media weight/Capacity (Simplex)a
tray1,2,3,4
Not available in tray1,2,3,4
multipurpose tray
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
• 10 sheets stacking
91 to 105 g/m2 (25 to 28 lb bond)
91 to 105 g/m2 (25 to 28 lb bond)
• 400 sheets for each tray
• 50 sheets stacking
106 to 176 g/m2 (29 to 47 lb bond)
106 to 176 g/m2 (29 to 47 lb bond)
• 350 sheets stacking
• 20 sheets stacking
177 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59 lb bond)
Not available in multipurpose tray
• 200 sheets stacking
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 18 lb bond)
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 18 lb bond)
• 520 sheets stacking
• 100 sheets stacking
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
• 400 sheets stacking
• 50 sheets stacking
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
• 400 sheets stacking
• 50 sheets stacking
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
• 400 sheets stacking
• 100 sheets stacking
11. Appendix
255
Specifications
Type
Bond
Size
Dimensions
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Archive
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Letter Head /
Hole Punched
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Thin cardstock /
Thin glossy
Refer to the Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Labelsb
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
print media weight/Capacity (Simplex)a
tray1,2,3,4
multipurpose tray
105 to 120g/m2 (28 to 32 lb bond)
105 to 120g/m2 (28 to 32 lb bond)
• 350 sheets stacking
• 20 sheets stacking
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
• 400 sheets stacking
• 50 sheets stacking
106 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb bond)
106 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb bond)
• 350 sheets stacking
• 20 sheets stacking
Not available in tray1,2,3,4
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond)
• 20 sheets stacking
Tray 1 minimum size (custom)
148 x 210 mm (5.85 x 8.27 inches)
Tray 1 maximum size (custom)
297 x 364 mm (11.7 x 14.3 inches)
Tray 2,3,4 minimum size (custom)
148 x 210 mm (5.85 x 8.27 inches)
Tray 2,3,4 maximum size (custom)
297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 inches)
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 59 lb bond)
Multipurpose tray minimum size (custom) 98 x 148 mm (3.87 x 5.82 inches)
-
-
60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond)
Multipurpose tray maximum size (custom) 297 x 432 mm (11.7x 17inches)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
b. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
11. Appendix
256
Specifications
5
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Windows® XP
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
RAM
128 MB (256 MB)
free HDD space
1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB (512 MB)
1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz
512 MB (1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
1 GB (2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows® 8
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
2 GB
20 GB
Windows® 8.1
Windows® 10
Windows Server® 2016
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2012
Windows Server® 2012 R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
512 MB (2 GB)
32 GB
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
11. Appendix
257
Specifications
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Mac OS X 10.5
• Intel® processors
RAM
Free HDD space
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
• 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel® processors
1 GB (2 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.10
• Intel® processors
2 GB
4 GB
Linux
Items
Operating system
Requirements
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6
Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
openSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1
Mint 13, 14, 15
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM
512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
11. Appendix
258
Specifications
Unix
Items
Requirements
Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)
Operating system
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1 7.1 (PowerPC)
Free HDD space
Up to 100 MB
11. Appendix
259
Specifications
6
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 8).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items
Specifications
Network interface
• Ethernet 10/100/100 Base-TX Wired Lan
Network operating system
• Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows Server® 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.10
• UNIX OS
Network protocols
• TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD, AirPrint, Google Cloud Print
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
11. Appendix
260
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
7
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 608251 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
8
Taiwan only
11. Appendix
261
Regulatory information
9
12
Ozone safety
Power saver
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
10
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
Mercury Safety
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
13
Recycling
11
Perchlorate warning
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide)
Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)
11. Appendix
262
Regulatory information
14
15
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
China only
(Applicable in countries with separate collection
systems)
Website : http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION
.VMUJ9QSFTT9-9
.VMUJ9QSFTT9-9
.VMUJ9QSFTT939
.VMUJ9QSFTT,-9
.VMUJ9QSFTT,-9
.VMUJ9QSFTT,39
(#
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
11. Appendix
263
Regulatory information
(The United States of America only)
18
Taiwan only
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
16
19
EU REACH SVHC Declaration
For information on Samsung’s environmental commitments and product
specific regulatory obligations e.g. REACH visit: www.samsung.com/uk/
aboutsamsung/samsungelectronics/corporatecitizenship/data_corner.html
Radio frequency emissions
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
17
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (USA
Only)
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
11. Appendix
264
Regulatory information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
20
RFID (Radio Frequency Interface Device)
RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. (U.S.A., France,
Taiwan only)
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
11. Appendix
265
Regulatory information
21
23
Taiwan only
Germany only
24
22
Turkey only
Russia / Kazakhstan / Belarus only
25
Thailand only
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
11. Appendix
266
Regulatory information
26
27
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
1 the date and time of transmission
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
11. Appendix
267
Regulatory information
28
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
•
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
11. Appendix
268
Regulatory information
•
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
•
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.You cannot rewire
the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
29
• Green and Yellow: Earth
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
11. Appendix
269
Regulatory information
30
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
Approvals and Certifications
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [K425x/K430x/
K435x/X422x/X425x/X430x series] is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE
Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
11. Appendix
270
Regulatory information
31
China only
᳝ᆇ⠽䋼
11. Appendix
271
Copyright
© 2014 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for informational purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
•
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
•
Microsoft, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 2008 Server R2, Windows 8, Windoews 10 and Windows Server 2016 are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
•
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
•
ABBYY® FineReader® Engine for Embedded OS © 2009 ABBYY. ABBYY FineReader - the keenest eye in OCR. ABBYY, FINEREADER and ABBYY FineReader are
registered trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd.
•
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
11. Appendix
272
Copyright
The software included in this product contains open source software. You may obtain the complete
corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email
to mailto:oss.request@samsung.com. It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a
physical medium such as a CD-ROM; a minimal charge will be required.
The following URLhttps://opensource.samsung.com/opensource/X4300_K4350_Series/seq/0 leads to
the download page of the source code made available and open source license information as related to
this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
QR code
REV. 10.00
11. Appendix
273
User’s Guide
Samsung Multifunction MultiXpress
X422x/X425x/X430x series
K425x/K430x/K435x series
ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)
This administrator’s guide provides advanced information for administrator’s
to use and manage the machine.
Some features may not be available depending on model or country.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on Windows.
ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)
1. About this administrator’s guide
3. Network setup
Convention
278
Network environment
307
Intended audience
279
Accessing network setup
308
Security policies for administrators
280
Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
309
Terminology used in this guide
281
Print settings (Ports to set for network
2. Advanced Features for Settings
Menu
printing)
312
Set Protocols
313
Network filtering settings
314
Installing driver over the network
315
Log-in
283
Samsung Mobile Print
323
Language and Input
284
AirPrint
324
Machine
285
Google Cloud Print™
325
Admin Settings
290
Management
298
Network Settings
300
System
304
4. Maintenance
Monitoring the supplies life
328
Setting supplies reorder notification
329
Replacing & redistributing supplies
330
Finding the serial number
331
Clearing memory
332
Cleaning the machine
333
275
ADVANCED (ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE)
Tips for storing the machine, supplies,
and paper
344
Tips for moving the machine
345
Printing a demo page
346
276
1. About this
administrator’s guide
This administrator’s guide provides advanced information for administrator’s to use and manage the machine. Your
machine provides features that are available only for administrators, such as remotely installing the driver or creating
the installer package. You can also refer to this guide for maintenance information (eg., cleaning the
machine, replacing toner cartridges). This guide provides instructional screen images, easy-to-read tables of
features, and step-by-step instructions.
• Convention
278
• Intended audience
279
• Security policies for administrators
280
• Terminology used in this guide
281
• Read the safety information before using the machine.
• Terms used in this administrator’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (see "Glossary"
on page 354).
• The illustrations in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its
options or models but the procedures are the same.
• The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine depending on
the machine’s firmware/driver version.
• The procedures in this administrator’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
Convention
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
Convention
Description
Bold
For texts on the display or button names on the machine.
Note
Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and
feature.
Caution
Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or
malfunction.
Example
Start
The date format may differ from country
to country.
Do not touch the surface of the drum
located in the toner cartridge or imaging
unit.
Footnote
Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase.
a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”)
Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information.
(See "Glossary" on page 354.)
1. About this administrator’s guide
278
Intended audience
The expected user for this guide is an administrator with an understanding of:
•
General knowledge of machine and other optional parts.
•
Basic technical knowledge.
•
The network printing environment.
•
Network protocols – subnets, security features, addresses.
•
Windows operating systems on server and client computers.
1. About this administrator’s guide
279
Security policies for administrators
Administrators need to adhere to the following policies in order to securely
manage the machine:
•
The administrator should place the machine in a secure place where the
machine can be protected by the physical contact or modulation,
•
The administrator should be fully aware of the security policies the
organization has and follow them to manage the machine.
•
The administrator should give the right to use the machine to users
according to the security policies and procedures.
•
The administrator should not use the authority one has over the machine
with ill intention.
•
The administrator should manage the machine in a trusted network
supported environment.
•
The administrator should guarantee that the certifying service via
certification server is through a safe channel and is safely managed.
•
The administrator should provide a Time Stamp feature to keep an accurate
system log history.
•
The administrator should provide a safe secure network channel with SSL.
•
The administrator should save the system log files exported by the
Exporting feature in a safe place and protected.
•
The administrator should protect the machine from any unauthorized
contact with external interfaces.
1. About this administrator’s guide
280
Terminology used in this guide
The following terms are used throughout this guide in examples, instructions,
and descriptions:
Acronyms
Meaning
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
PEAPv0/EAP- Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol version 0/
MS-CHAPv2 Extensible Authentication Protocol-Microsoft ChallengeHandshake Authentication Protocol version 2
1
Synonym
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Terms
Synonym
Document
original
Paper
media, print media
Machine
printer, MFP, device
User’s Guide
manual, guide
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
MFP
Multi-Functional Peripheral/Multi-Functional Printer
S/N
Serial Number
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
TLS
Transport Layer Security
UPnP
Universal Plug and Play
MDNS
Multicast Domain Name System
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
SLP
Service Location Protocol
SMB
Server Message Block
SWS
SyncThru™Web Service
WINS
Windows Internet Name Service
WSD
Web Service for Device
2
Acronyms
The following acronyms are used throughout this guide in examples,
instructions, and descriptions:
Acronyms
Meaning
DBMS
Data Base Management System
EAP-MD5
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest 5
EAP-MSCHAPv2
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Microsoft ChallengeHandshake Authentication Protocol version 2
IP
Internet Protocol
3
Glossary
(See "Glossary" on page 354.)
1. About this administrator’s guide
281
2. Advanced Features for
Settings Menu
This chapter explains the Settings menu provided by your machine. The Settings menu provides various options for
administrators to set in order to use the machine to its full capabilities.
This chapter includes:
• Log-in
283
• Language and Input
284
• Machine
285
• Admin Settings
290
• Management
298
• Network Settings
300
• System
304
• This administrator’s guide mainly describes features administrators would often use and
settings to set before using the machine.
• For some options, you need to contact your local service provider to set the settings.
• Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the settings or models. If
so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Some options are only available to the administrator depending on the authentication
settings selected (see "Authentication" on page 292).
Log-in
Depending on the authentication settings you selected, you may need to log-in
as an administrator to access some options under Settings menu (see
"Authentication" on page 292). Contact your network service provider or
network administrator for more information.
1
2
Tap Settings from the home screen or Apps.
Select the option you want. If the option is available for only the
administrator, log-in screen appears.
Enter the ID, Password, and Domain using the pop-up keyboard which
appears when you tap each field.
• Enter the ID and password you first set when you turned on the
machine(see "Initial settings (administrator only)" on page 294).
• You can also use the Recent Users button to find the recently used ID
and Domain List button to find the domain from the list stored in the
machine.
• When you log-in, you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display.
3
Tap Log in.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
283
Language and Input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus.
You can also set onscreen keyboard options.
2
Input
Tap Settings > Language and Input from the home screen or Apps.
Feature
Description
Language
Allows you to select the language.
Keyboard & Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your
machine.
Speech
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine cancels the held
job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the
amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the
current menu.
3
Keyboard & Input Methods
Allows you to set the speech settings for
Voiceinput.
Allows you to specify the keyboard that the machine uses.
1
•
Default: Select the default input language and method.
Language
4
Allows you to select the language that appears on the display screen.
Tap Settings > Language from the home screen or Apps then select the
language what you want.
Speech
•
Text-to-speech output : Provides audible readout of text, for example, the
contents of email messages.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
284
Machine
Before using the machine, set up the general settings.
Feature
Power Saver
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
Timers
Allows you to set the time for machine to
return to the default setting or cancel the held
job if there is no input for an extended time
(see "Timers (administrator only)" on page
288).
Ecoa
Allows you to set the Eco mode as a default
and change settings for Eco mode. Using Eco
mode can save printing resources (see "ECO"
on page 289).
Tap Settings > Machine from the home screen or Apps.
Description
Tray Settings
Allows you to adjust the current tray settings,
such as the paper type and tray priorities (see
"Tray settings" on page 285).
Sound
Allows you to set the volume for button
sound, notice alarm, and sounds occurring
during fax job. You can test the volume right
after you set the level (see "Sound" on page
286).
Display
Allows you to set the wallpaper, brightness, ,
and quick launch.
Storage
Management all application’s storage.
Adjustment
Allows you to adjust altitude, huminity,
image, and macine test functions.
Allows you to reduce energy consumption. If
you set this option, the machine goes into
power saving mode when not in use.
There are two power saving modes (see
"Power Saver" on page 287).
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
Feature
Description
a. Available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected (see
"Authentication" on page 292).
5
Tray settings
This feature allows you to check the current tray settings and change the
settings if necessary. There are many options available for setting the tray and
paper. Make the best use of the options to fit your needs for trays and paper.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
285
Machine
7
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System >Input Trays (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
If some options are grayed out, it means that the grayed-out option is not
supported for your machine or optional parts needed to use the option are
not installed.
Display
you can change various settings for the display.
•
Wallpaper: Assigns a wallpaper for the Home screen, Login screen, or both.
•
Screen: Allows you to adjust the LCD brightness.
•
Quick Launch: You can select the register at Quick Launch (Screen
Capture, Applications, Search, Job Status)
8
Storage
6
Sound
You can set the volume for button sound, notice alarm, and the sounds
occurring during a fax job. Using the slide bar select the desired volume and
press the Test button to test the volume.
•
Key Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when pressing the
button
•
Alarm Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when notice
alarm.
•
Fax Sound: Allows you to adjust the sound volume occurring during a fax
job. This option has other sub-options.
You can management the all application storage and shows all storage
informations.
If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time and date
once the power has been restored.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
286
Machine
•
9
Adjustment
Tone Adjustment: Allows you to automatically adjust the color tone to
produce the best possible print quality.
-
Auto Tone Adjustment Activation: Instructs the machine to
automatically calibrate the tone at certain intervals. Activate this option
to perform a normal or full tone adjustment after a certain number or
pages are printed or the machine is not used for a certain period.
-
Auto Tone Adjustment: Performs a normal or full tone adjustment
sequence immediately.
You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located. You can
also adjustment the image management and checking the machine test.
•
Altitude Adjustment : You can choose the altitude of the place where your
machine is located. The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,
which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level.
Therefore, it is important to set the right altitude.
Normal
0 ~ 1,000 m (3,280 ft)
High 1
1,000 m (3,280 ft) ~ 2,000 m (6,561 ft)
High 2
2,000 m (6,561 ft) ~ 3,000 m (9,842 ft)
High 3
3,000 m (9,842 ft) ~ 4,000 m (13,123 ft)
High 4
4,000 m (13,123 ft) ~ 5,000 m (16,404 ft)
•
Humidity : Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the
environment.
•
Custom Color: Allows you to adjust the level of print density and copy
darkness.
• Normal: Automatically adjusts the color tone. This process takes more
time than Quick, but it produces better results.
• Full: Changes the color table entirely to adjust the color tone.
•
Machine Test: Allows you to adjust the tone level.
-
Print Adjustment : Allows you to adjust the print area. When images are
printed off the page or shifted, adjust the print area.
10
Power Saver
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this option to save power.
The Power Save option can be wake up by pressing the display screen.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
287
Machine
Performance Optimization
11
Timers (administrator only)
When this option is On, you can wake up the machine from the power saving
mode with the following actions:
•
Pressing
(Power / Wakeup) on the control panel.
•
Loading paper in a tray.
•
Opening or closing the cover.
•
Pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in.
•
Place the originals in the DSDF.
•
Plug in the USB Drive device.
Low Power Save
Low Power Save option allows your machine to save power. When you are not
using the machine for a while, some parts of the machine automatically enter
Low Power Save option. Low Power Save option conserves less power than
Power Save option.
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine cancels the held
job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings. You can set the
amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the
current menu.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
Machine Settings > System > Setup.
•
System Timeout: The machine returns to the Copy menu if there is no input
for the given time.
•
Held Job Timeout: When an error occurs while printing and there is no
signal from the computer, the machine holds a job for a specific time period
before deleting it.
•
Job Timeout: When there is no input for a certain period of time, the
machine cancels the current job. You can set the amount of time the
machine will wait before canceling the job.
Power Save
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this option to save power.
The machine conserves more power in Power Save option than in Low Power
Save mode.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
288
Machine
12
ECO
Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing.
•
Default Mode : Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off.
On-Forced: Sets the Eco mode on. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode off,
the user needs to enter the password.
•
Eco Features Configuration : Setting the ECO fratures.
-
Default Settings: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.
-
Custom Settings: Change any necessary values.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
289
Admin Settings
This option is only available to administrators.
Feature
Print Settings
You can set print related settings. When there
is no specific input for printing options, the
machine prints with the settings you set here.
Set the frequently used printing settings. This
feature can be useful if your company has a
specific printing form (see "Print Settings" on
page 295).
Box Settings
Allows you to check the current box settings
and change the settings if necessary (see "Box
Settings" on page 296).
Report Settings
The paper source setting specifies the default
paper tray that the machine uses to print
reports.
Application Management
You can install or uninstall applications
license. If you add an application, you need to
activate the license of the installed
application. Some applications may not have
a license (see "Application Management" on
page 296).
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
Tap Settings > Admin Settings from the home screen or Apps.
Feature
Description
Security
Allows you to set up the security related
settings (see "Security" on page 291).
General Settings
Allows you to set up the general settings
(Measurement, Supplies Management,
Contention Management, and other
settings) (see "General Settings" on page 293).
Initial Settings
Allows you to set the basic settings needed to
be set before using the machine (see "Initial
settings (administrator only)" on page 294).
Fax Settings
You can set the default fax options. Set the
most frequently used fax settings (see "Fax
Settings" on page 295).
Description
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
290
Admin Settings
13
•
Scheduled Image Overwrite: you can set the schedule to manually
overwrite the image.
•
Overwrite Method: You can select the method for overwriting the secure
non-volatile memory(hard).
Security
Allows you to set up the security related settings.
-
German VSITR: Select to overwrite the memory 7 times. When
overwriting for the 6 times, alternate 0x00 and 0xff are used to overwrite
the disk, and, in the 7th time, the disk is written with 0xAA.
-
DoD 5220.28-M: Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When
overwriting three times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite
the disk’s content. This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US
DoD.
-
Australian ACSI 33: Select to overwrite the memory 5 times. When
overwriting 5 times, character “C” and its complement alternatively are
used to overwrite the disk. After the 2nd time, there is a mandatory
validation. For the 5th time, random data is used.
-
DoD 5220.22M (ECE): Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When
overwriting three times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite
the disk’s content. This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US
DoD.
-
Custom Overwrite: Select to determine the number of times the
memory will be overwritten. The hard disk will be overwritten as many
times as the number you select.
Image Overwrite
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory. The machine
overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of
recovery.
This feature may not be available depending on models or option kits
installed.
•
•
Automatic Image Overwrite: When a job is completed, there are temporal
images left in the memory. For security reasons, you can set the machine to
automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to secure
memory space, you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure
non-volatile memory.
Manual Image Overwrite: When printing, copying, scanning, and faxing,
the machine temporarily uses memory space. For security reasons, you can
set the machine to manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you
want to secure memory space, you can manually overwrite secure nonvolatile memory. You can set the machine to repeat the manual image
overwrite after the system is rebooted.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
291
Admin Settings
Authentication
-
This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user
authentication.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Security tab
> User Access Control. (see "Security tab" on page 162).
•
▪
LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪
SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
Kerberos and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process
based on the user information stored at kerberos server.
▪
LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪
SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
Mode: Select the authentication mode.
LDAP and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process
based on the user information stored at LDAPserver.
-
▪
LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪
SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
-
-
•
SMB and Local Authentication: Executes authentication process
based on the user information stored at SMB server.
Basic Authentication: Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to
login when they select options that are only available to administrators.
Those options are marked with “a” or “(administrator only)” in this guide.
-
Device Authentication: Activate device authentication. Device
authentication requests a user to login before being able to use the
device. Users cannot use any application without logging in.
Application Authentication: Activate application authentication. An
administrator can choose the application(s) to require user to login to
use. Users cannot use the selected application(s) without logging-in.
Press Application Mode to enable authentication.
-
Method
-
Local Authentication: Executes authentication process based on the
user information stored at HDD in the device.
▪
LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪
SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
-
SyncThruAaProvider: Executes authentication process based on the
user information allocated from SWS.
▪
LUI Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For-LUI , by default.
▪
SWS Login Screen: Provides Pre-Installed-For SWS, by default.
Standard Accounting Only: Allows users to login by entering ID and
password.
▪
ID/PW Login: You can login from ID&Password.
▪
ID Only Login: You can login from ID only.
Options : Select what to require for the user to login
▪
Auto Logout: You can use auto logout.
▪
Seconds: You can set the auto logout time.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
292
Admin Settings
•
▪
Logout Policy: You can select the logout Identification type.
▪
Login Restriction: You can set the Login Restriction time, attempts,
or lock-out time.
▪
Logout Policy: You can set the logout policy.
14
General Settings
Allows you to set up the genaral settings.
Secure Print: You can login from secure print.
Measurement
Accounting
You can choose the measuring unit and default paper size.
You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard
accounting method is chosen (see "Authentication" on page 292).
Supplies Management
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Security tab
> User Access Control > Accounting > Accounting Methods. (see
"Security tab" on page 178).
•
No Accounting: Select not to use this feature.
•
Standard Accounting: Select to use the installed job accounting method.
•
SyncThruAaProvider: Select to use the job accounting method provided
by the SyncThru™Web Admin Service (For detailed information, refer to the
SyncThru™Web Admin Service guide).
Allows you to set options for supplies reorder notification. If you set this option,
the machine will display a warning message when the supplies are running out.
Prepare the supplies in advance.
• Imaging Unit Reorder Notification: Issues a notification when the
imaging unit has the specified lifespan remaining.
• Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification: Issues a notification when a
toner cartridge has the specified lifespan remaining.
• Toner Save: The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing
toner when printing a document.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
293
Admin Settings
Contention Management
•
Administrator Account: Input the Name, New Password, Confirm
Password.The admin is entered as a default in Name field.
Allows you to set Copy, Print, Send, Report priority.
•
Date & Time: Set the Date, Time, Time Zone, date and hour format, and
Day light Saving.
More Settings
Example for selecting the time zone, select your country area.
You can set Job Progress Window and Job Deletion.
•
Job Progress Window: Allows you to show job progress in display.
•
Job Deletion: The Job Deletion setting specifies whether users can delete
all jobs or only the jobs that they create.
-
Allow all jobs to delete : All users allow all jobs to delete.
-
Allow only own jobs to delete : Users allow only own jobs to delete.
•
Device Attribution: Remove the existing device name and enter the device
name you want to use. then tap Next. Keep in mind to enter the device
name to be used on the network.
• If necessary, enter the location of the machine in the Location field.
• If necessary, enter the information in the Administrator field for the
person to contact when any problem occurs on the machine.
15
Initial settings (administrator only)
You can change the initial settings when you first turn the machine on.
•
Verify Connections: Tap the Test button to verify the Ethernet Card
connection. When Connected appears after tap the Test button, press
Next.
If Not connected appears, make sure that the machine is connected to the
network then verify the LAN connection again.
If you want to stop adjusting the initial settings, press Exit. The settings you
have set so far will be saved. However, the Exit button is not enabled if it’s
the first time using this option.
•
Language: Select the language to use on the display screen then tap Next.
•
Note: Read and tap Next.
• If a network connection problem persists, contact your network
administrator.
• If you installed an optional fax kit or finisher, press each Test button for
verify connection of them.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
294
Admin Settings
•
Network Settings: Enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Host
Name, Domain Name, Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server in
each field. Then tap Next.
• If the optional fax is not installed, the fax icon will not appear on the
display screen.
• The fax options are different from country to country depending on the
International Communications Regulatory. If some of the fax options
explained in the instructions have been grayed-out, it means that the
grayed-out option is not supported in your communication
environment.
• If a new IP address is assigned automatically by a DHCP or BOOTP, press
DHCP or BOOTP.
• If you are not sure about your network environment, contact your
network administrator.
•
• You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings tab >
Machine Settings > Fax (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
SNMP Configuration: Enter the Community Name, Access Permission,
Authentication User Name, Authentication Password, Authentication
Confirm Password, Privacy Password and Privacy Confirm Password in
each field. Then tap Done.
17
Print Settings
16
Fax Settings
You can set the default fax options. Set the most frequently used fax settings.
Tap Settings > Fax Settings from the display screen.
You can set print related settings. When there is no specific input for printing
options, the machine prints with the settings you set here. Set the frequently
used printing settings. This feature can be useful if your company has a specific
printing form.
Tap Settings > Print Settings from the display screen.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the Settings tab
> Machine Settings > Printer. (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
295
Admin Settings
18
• You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click the
Maintenance tab > Application Management. (see "Maintenance tab"
on page 164).
Box Settings
You can store documents print,download and sent from computers or scanned
images in the Box. The Box is located on your machine’s hard disk drive (HDD).
It means the documents are stored on the HDD. You can create a password for a
certain Stored Document, so unauthorized users cannot access it. Also, you can
print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the
documents to several destination such as email, server or fax. You can set a
Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru™ Web
Service.
If important data is stored in the Box, we recommend you to backup the
data regularly. Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of
data caused by misuse or failure of the machine.
• Some models may not support this feature.
Installing an application
1
2
Tap Install button.
3
A verification message appears. Read the agreement and check I accept
terms of the License Agreement and press OK.
19
A pop-up window with folder tree appears. Select the application file
and press OK.
Application installation begins.
Application Management
You can install or uninstall applications/license. If you add an application, you
need to activate the license of the installed application. Some applications may
not have a license.
Tap Settings > Application Management from the home screen or Apps.
Viewing an application in details
1
2
Tap the application name you want to view in details.
View the application’s information in details.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
296
Admin Settings
Enabling/Disabling an application
1
Select the application you want to enable/disable and press Enable/
Disable.
2
The application you selected is enabled/disabled.
Uninstalling an application
1
2
Select the application you want to uninstall and tap Uninstall.
A confirmation window appears. Press Yes.
The application you selected is uninstalled.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
297
Management
21
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
Report
This feature allows you to print all the reports provided by your machine. You
can use these reports to help you maintain your machine.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information >
Print information (see "Information tab" on page 160).
You can checking the supplies life and printing report.
Tap Settings > Management from the home screen or Apps.
20
Supplies Life
•
System Report
-
Configuration: Print to see the machine configuration information.
Product information, version information, product setting, and paper
setting are included.
-
Supplies Information: Print to check remaining percentage of each
supply.
-
Usage Counter: Print to check the count of the jobs performed. Print
usage, scan usage, and fax usage information are included.
-
Demo Page: Print demo page to check if the machine is working
properly. Also you can select A4 or Letter size.
-
Error Information: Print to check what errors have occurred in the
machine. Error types and counts are included.
-
Network Configuration: Print to see the network configuration
information. Network configuration information such as TCP/IP, Raw
TCP/IP, and LPD information are printed.
This feature allows you to check the remaining percentage of each supply.
ex) toner cartridge / imaging unit
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
298
Management
•
•
Account: Print to see the account list.
Send:
-
Send Confirmation: You can set the machine to print a report whether
a send was successfully completed or not.
-
Fax Received: Print to check the list of faxes received.
-
Fax sent: Print to check the list of faxes sent.
-
Fax scheduled jobs: Print to check the list of scheduled fax jobs.
-
Email sent: Print to check the transmission state of the Scan to Email
job.
Font:
-
PCL Font List: Print to see the PCL font list.
-
PS Font List: Print to see the PS font list
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
299
Network Settings
This option is setting the Network Settings functions.
Feature
802.1x
Description
You can enable/disable 802.1x Security.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
802.1x Authentication Method You can select the authentication algorithm
to use.
• Click the
DHCPv6 Identity Association
Identifier
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
Show the DHCP Identity Association
Identifier.
then click on any option you want to know about.
TCP/IPv4
Tap Settings > Network Settings from the home screen or Apps.
You can set IPv4 settings.
22
•
Ethernet
Feature
Description
Ethernet Port
You can enable/disable ethernet port.
Ethernet Speed
You can select the speed rate of ethernet.
MAC Address
Shows the Mac address of the machine.
IP Setting
You can set the TCP/IPv4 IP setting.
DNS Configuration
You can set the DNS setting.
WINS
You can configure the WINS server.
Display IP Address
You can set the machine to display the IP
address on the Home screen.
Protocol
You can enable/disable IPv6 protocol.
IPv6 Address
You can set the IPv6 address types.
DHCPv6 Configuration
You can set the DHCPv6 configuration.
DHCP Unique Identifier
Show the DHCP Unique Identifier.
•
IP Setting: You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses.
-
Static: Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address
manually.
-
BOOTP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by the BOOTP Server.
-
DHCP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by the DHCP Server.
DNS Configuration: You can configure the DNS server.
-
Host Name: Enter the host name. You can enter up to 63 characters.
Default name is “SEC[MAC address]”.
-
Domain Name: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128
characters.
-
Primary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to
use primarily.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
300
Network Settings
-
•
•
Secondary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want
to use as an alternative.
More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement, but
only one will be displayed in the display screen.
Dynamic DNS Registration: If you want to use, check the checkbox(es)
of dynamic DNS registration. If this option is checked, the machine
registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers
dynamically. Also, if this option is checked and DHCP is selected, DHCP
FQDN options are automatically disabled.
WINS: You can configure the WINS server. WINS is used in the Windows
operating system. Select this option.
•
Display IP Address: You can set the machine to display the IP address on
the Notification Bar. If you select this option the IP address will show on the
Notification Bar.
TCP/IPv6
You can set the IPv6 settings.
•
Protocol: Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system. Reboot the machine to
apply the change.
•
IPv6 Address: Shows the IPv6 address types.
-
Link-local Address: This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value
FE80. This address has local link scope and is automatically generated.
-
Stateless Address: This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router
advertised prefix and interface identifier. On a interface like Ethernet,
interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the
machine. The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations.
-
Stateful Address: This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6
server.
-
Manual Address: This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can
configure manually.
DHCPv6 Configuration: Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us.
-
Use DHCP as directed by a router: DHCPv6 is enabled when a router
advertises to use DHCPv6.
-
Always Enable DHCP: Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6
to acquire an IPv6 address.
-
Never use DHCP: Disables DHCPv6.
•
DHCP Unique Identifier: Show the DHCP Unique Identifier.
•
DHCP Identity Association Identifier: Show the DHCP Identity Association
Identifier.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
301
Network Settings
802.1x
23
Network Protocol
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If
this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the
protected side of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature
to protect your network.
You can enable/disable what you want functions as below list.
Feature
•
802.1x : Check to enable this feature.
•
802.1x Authentication Method: Select the authentication algorithm to
use.
LPR
-
EAP-MD5: Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable
to dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation.
IPP
-
PEAP: Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft
desktop clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended.
CIFS
-
EAP-MS-CHAPv2: MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication
between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the
Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the
Success packet.
-
TLS: This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet
between a client and server.
Description
Standard TCP/IP
ThinPrint
HTTP
SNMPv1/v2
You can enable/disable each functions.
SNMPv3
SNTP
UPnP(SSDP)
mDNS
SetIP
SLP
Telnet
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
302
Network Settings
24
Network Security
You can enable and configure these options in SyncThru™ Web Service
only(see "Security tab" on page 162).
Feature
Description
IPSec
You can disable IPSec if it is turned on in
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Network Filtering
You can disable the network filtering options
if it is turned on in SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
IPSec: You can disable IP security settings.
•
Network Filtering
-
MAC Filtering : Disable MAC filtering.
-
IPv4 Filtering : Disable IPv4 filtering.
-
IPv6 Filtering : Disable IPv6 filtering.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
303
System
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Click the
(Help) from the home screen or
(quick menu) and
then click on any option you want to know about.
Machine Details
You can check the detailed machine information. Check the status of installed
hardware and software versions to help you maintain the machine. You can
download the latest software from the Samsung website (http://
www.samsung.com/printer).
•
H/W Configuration: Shows the status of installed hardware including
optional parts .
•
Capabilities: Shows the capabilities of the hardware.
•
Software Versions: Shows the software versions of the systems installed.
25
Date and Time
When you set the time and date, it will be used for sending/printing delayed fax/
print jobs or will be printed on reports. However, if they are not correct, you need
to change it to the correct time.
27
Accessbility
26
About System
You can see the hardware configuration, system capabilities, and software
version of the machine.
Allows you to configure the machine to make it easier to use. In this menu, you
can change various sound, interaction, and display options so that the machine
is more accessible to users.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
304
System
28
Contact Information
This feature allows you to view the service center's information and contact
point where users can get help. If you log in as an administrator, you can change
the contact information.
•
System Administrator: Check the contact information of the administrator.
•
Samsung Support: Check the information of the service center.
2. Advanced Features for Settings Menu
305
3. Network setup
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network environment before using the machine. You
can set up the network environment using the Network Settings menu under the Settings menu. You need to be
familiar with the terms used for setting up the network environment. Refer to the glossary for terms you do not
understand ("Glossary" on page 354).
This chapter includes:
• Network environment
307
• Accessing network setup
308
• Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
309
• Print settings (Ports to set for network printing)
312
• Set Protocols
313
• Network filtering settings
314
• Installing driver over the network
315
• Samsung Mobile Print
323
• AirPrint
324
• Google Cloud Print™
325
Network environment
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on
your machine.
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
machine's control panel.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:
Item
Specification
Network interface
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T
Network operating
system
• Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows 8, Windows Server®
2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Various Unix OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.9
• Novell NetWare 5.x ~ 6.x
Network protocols
• TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP
• FTP,SMB, SMTP, WSD
• LDAP, Kerberos, 802.1x
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP,
IPSec)
3. Network setup
307
Accessing network setup
1
2
Make sure that the ethernet cable is connected to your machine.
3
Log-in as an administrator (see "Log-in" on page 283).
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet from the home screen or
Apps.
3. Network setup
308
Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
When you connect your machine to a network, you must first configure the TCP/
IP settings for the machine. The settings shown below are the basic settings
required for using your machine as a network machine. You can set TCP/IP, DNS
server, TCP/IPv6, Ethernet, and IP address allocation methods.
1
Ethernet
2
TCP/IP Protocol
You can set IPv4 settings.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > TCP/IPv4 from the home
screen or Apps.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
You can set ethernet settings.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet from the home screen or Apps.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
IP Setting
You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses.
•
Ethernet Port: You can enable/disable ethernet port.
•
Ethernet Speed: Choose the speed rate of ethernet.
•
MAC Address: Shows the Mac address of the machine.
•
Static: Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address manually.
•
BOOTP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by the BOOTP Server.
•
DHCP: IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by the DHCP Server.
3. Network setup
309
Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
DNS Configuration
3
TCP/IPv6
You can configure the DNS server.
•
Host Name: Enter the host name. You can enter up to 63 characters. Default
name is “SEC[MAC address]”.
•
Domain Name: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.
•
Primary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use
primarily.
•
Secondary DNS Server: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to
use as an alternative.
•
Dynamic DNS Registration: If you want to use, check the checkbox(es) of
dynamic DNS registration. If this option is checked, the machine registers its
host name and domain name to configured DNS servers dynamically. Also,
if this option is checked and DHCP is selected, DHCP FQDN options are
automatically disabled.
WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)
You can configure the WINS server. WINS is used in the Windows operating
system. Select this option.
Display IP address
You can set the IPv6 settings.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > TCP/IPv6 from the home
screen or Apps.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
•
Protocol: Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system. Reboot the machine to
apply the change.
•
IPv6 Address: Shows the IPv6 address types.
-
Link-local Address: This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value
FE80. This address has local link scope and is automatically generated.
-
Stateless Address: This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router
advertised prefix and interface identifier. On a interface like Ethernet,
interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the
machine. The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations.
More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement, but
only one will be displayed in the display screen.
You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar. If you
select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar.
3. Network setup
310
Network settings (configuring TCP/IP)
•
-
Stateful Address: This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6
server.
-
PEAP: Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft
desktop clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended.
-
Manual Address: This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can
configure manually.
-
EAP-MS-CHAPv2: MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication
between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the
Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the
Success packet.
-
TLS: This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet
between a client and server.
DHCPv6 Configuration: Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us.
-
Use DHCP as directed by a router: DHCPv6 is enabled when a router
advertises to use DHCPv6.
-
Always Enable DHCP: Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6
to acquire an IPv6 address.
-
Never use DHCP: Disables DHCPv6.
4
802.1x
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If
this authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the
protected side of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature
to protect your network.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet > 802.1x from the home screen
or Apps.
•
802.1x : Check to enable this feature.
•
802.1x Authentication Method: Select the authentication algorithm to
use.
-
EAP-MD5: Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable
to dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation.
3. Network setup
311
Print settings (Ports to set for network printing)
You can set the ports to use when printing. If you want to print though the
network, you need to select the following ports.
Tap Settings > Management > Report > Network Configuration from the
home screen or Apps then tap Print.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
3. Network setup
312
Set Protocols
You can enable/disable the protocols (Standard TCP/IP, LPR, IPP, ThinPrint,
CIFS, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), SLP (Service Location Protocol),
Telnet, SNMP V1/V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol), SNMPv3,
UPnP(SSDP) Protocol, and mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System), SetIP, and
HTTP.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
3. Network setup
313
Network filtering settings
You can set your machine to prevent unlisted IP or MAC addresses from
connecting to the machine.
You can set general network filtering settings.
Tap Settings > Network Settings > Network Security > Network Filtering
from the home screen or App.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine (see "Settings tab" on page 161).
•
MAC Filtering: Disable MAC filtering.
•
IPv4 Filtering: Disable IPv4 filtering.
•
IPv6 Filtering: Disable IPv6 filtering.
3. Network setup
314
Installing driver over the network
You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software includes
drivers, applications, and other support programs.
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All
applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation.
5
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
3. Network setup
315
Installing driver over the network
4
Select Network on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click
Next.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2
3
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
a From Charms, select Search.
b Click Store.
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name.
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
Silent installation Mode
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on your computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
3. Network setup
316
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
Command- line
/s or/S
Definition
Starts silent installation.
Description
Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs or
user intervention.
Definition
/p”<port name>” or/ Specifies printer port.
P”<port name>”
Network Port will
be created by use
of Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
Description
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name, IEEE1284 port name or
network path.
For example:
• /p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
• /
p"\\computer_name\shar
ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\share
d_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared_
printer" means the
network path to the
printer by entering two
slashes, the computer
name or local IP address of
the PC sharing the printer,
and then the share name
of the printer.
3. Network setup
317
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
Definition
Description
/a”<dest_path>” or/
A”<dest_path>”
Specifies destination path
for installation.
Since machine drivers should
be installed on the OS
specific location, this
command applies to only
application software.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified
path.
/n”<Printer name>”
or/N”<Printer
name>”
Specifies printer name.
Printer instance shall be
created as specified
printer name.
/nd or/ND
Commands not to set the It indicates installed machine
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default
machine driver.
machine driver on your
system if there are one or
more printer drivers installed.
If there is no installed
machine driver on your
system, then this option
won’t be applied because
Windows OS will set installed
printer driver as a default
machine driver.
Command- line
/x or/X
Definition
Uses existing machine
driver files to create
printer instance if it is
already installed.
Description
This command provides a
way to install a printer
instance that uses installed
printer driver files without
installing an additional
driver.
/up”<printer
Removes only specified
name>” or/
printer instance and not
UP”<printer name>” the driver files.
This command provides a
way to remove only specified
printer instance from your
system without effecting
other printer drivers. It will
not remove printer driver
files from your system.
/d or/D
This command will remove all
installed device drivers and
application software from
your system.
With this parameter, you can
add printer instances as your
wishes.
Uninstalls all device
drivers and applications
from your system.
/v”<share name>”
Shares installed machine
or/V”<share name>” and add other available
platform drivers for Point
& Print.
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
machine drivers to system
and share it with specified
<share name> for point and
print.
/o or /O
Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open
folder after installation.
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
/h, /H or /?
Shows Command-line Usage.
3. Network setup
318
Installing driver over the network
6
Mac
1
2
3
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
Enter the password and click OK.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
12
13
14
Click IP and Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
15
if Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and
your machine name in Print Using.
16
17
18
Click Add.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Continue.
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
Click Continue.
After the installation is finished, click Close.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
3. Network setup
319
Installing driver over the network
10
11
7
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine’s IP address.
Click Forward button and add it to your system.
8
UNIX
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2
3
Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
• The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied
thepackage to.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Operating System" on page 8).
4
5
6
Extract the package.
7
8
Proceed with installation.
9
Click Add button.
Move to uld folder.
Execute ” ./install.sh“ command (If you are not logged in as root,execute
the command with “sudo” as “sudo ./install.sh”).
When installation finished, launch Printing utility (Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute “system-config-printer“
command in Terminal program).
• Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 8).
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
product > Support or Downloads).
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
3. Network setup
320
Installing driver over the network
1
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
Driver package to your computer.
2
Acquire root privileges.
“su -”
3
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
8
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
“accept <printer_name>”
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
4
“enable <printer_name>”
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
Uninstalling the printer driver package
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
5
6
the unpacked directory.
Run the install script.
“./install –i”
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
7
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
3. Network setup
321
Installing driver over the network
Setting up the printer
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
1
2
3
Type the name of the printer.
4
5
6
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Click OK to add the printer.
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
3. Network setup
322
Samsung Mobile Print
9
11
What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones
but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a
network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi
access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for quick and
easy viewing on your mobile device.
Supported Mobile OS
•
Android OS 2.3 or higher
•
iOS 4.0 or higher
10
Downloading Samsung Mobile Print
To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for
“Samsung Mobile Print.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your
computer.
3. Network setup
323
AirPrint
4
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. then click LOGIN.
Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
machine (see "Log-in" on page 283.)
AirPrint allows you to print directly from iPhone, iPad and iPod touch
running the latest version of iOS.
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
6
Click AirPrint.
12
13
Setting up AirPrint
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
1
2
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
Printing via AirPrint
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
1
2
3
4
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
Touch the action icon(
).
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
Touch Print button. Print it out.
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
3
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.
3. Network setup
324
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
5
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
6
Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain. Then click on
LOGIN.
Use the same login ID, Password, Domain as when logging in from the
machine (see "Log-in" on page 283.)
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
14
Registering your Google account to the printer
Registering from the Chrome Browser
• Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
• You should create your Google account in the advance.
1
2
3
4
7
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
8
9
Enter your printer’s name and description.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
Open the Chrome browser.
Visit www.google.com.
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
Click Register.
10
Click Finish printer registration.
3. Network setup
325
Google Cloud Print™
11
Click Manage your printers.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
15
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™
service.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
Tap the option
Tap the send
button of the document that you want to print.
button.
Tap the Cloud Print
button.
Set the printing options if you want.
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing from the Chrome browser
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
1
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Run Chrome.
Open the document or email that you want to print.
Click the wrench icon
in the browser’s top right corner.
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
Click the Print button.
3. Network setup
326
4. Maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Monitoring the supplies life
328
• Setting supplies reorder notification
329
• Replacing & redistributing supplies
330
• Finding the serial number
331
• Clearing memory
332
• Cleaning the machine
333
• Tips for storing the machine, supplies, and paper 344
• Tips for moving the machine
345
• Printing a demo page
346
Monitoring the supplies life
Check remaining life of the supplies and prepare the supplies in advance.
You can also print the supplies life report. Select Supplies Information in the
Report feature (see "Report" on page 298, "Information tab" on page 160).
1
From the machine
1
2
Tap Settings > Management > Supplies Life from the main screen.
Check the consumables life.
We recommend you prepare new supplies or those that you have used over
90% of their average yield (see "Replacing & redistributing supplies" on
page 330).
2
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
1
From the SyncThru™ Web Service, select the Information tab >
Supplies.
2
Check the remaining percentage.
We recommend you prepare new supplies if the remaining percentage is
less than 10% (see "Replacing & redistributing supplies" on page 330).
4. Maintenance
328
Setting supplies reorder notification
Set the supplies reorder notification to receive notification emails and prepare
supplies in advance.
See "Supplies Management" on page 293.
4. Maintenance
329
Replacing & redistributing supplies
3
Replacing the toner cartridge
At this stage, the imaging unit needs to be replaced. Be sure to prepare a new
imaging unit in advance (see "Ordering supplies and accessories" on page 236).
How to replace the imaging unit.
When the toner cartridge is totally empty:
5
•
The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message
of replacing toner.
•
The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory.
However, when the toner cartridge is empty, but you can still print blackand-white print jobs (The submitted job must be in black and white).
•
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Ordering
supplies and accessories" on page 236).
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Be sure to prepare new
toner cartridge in advance (see "Ordering supplies and accessories" on page
236). How to replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 186).
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
White streaks or light printing occurs.
•
Toner low related message appears on the display.
•
The Status LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the
remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing
will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. How to redistribute
the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 184).
4
Replacing the imaging unit
When the imaging unit is totally empty:
•
The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message
of replacing imaging unit.
•
Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine ("Ordering supplies and
accessories" on page 236).
4. Maintenance
330
Finding the serial number
You might need to know the serial number of your machine when calling for a
service. To check the serial number of your machine, follow the steps below.
The serial number is written on the beginning of all the machine reports.
1
Tap Settings > Management > Report > Usage Counter > Print from
the home screen or Apps.
OR
Select the Information tab > Usage Counters From the SyncThru™ Web
Service.
2
Check the serial number.
4. Maintenance
331
Clearing memory
There are few ways to clear memory to ensure the memory capacity of your
machine. Select one of the ways below.
Clearing fax memory without printing a fax job
If you clear fax memory without checking the fax job by printing it first, you
might erase jobs that you do not want to. Be careful not to erase important
documents.
6
Clearing stored documents
Check the stored documents before clearing machine memory.
1
2
3
Tap Box from the home screen or Apps.
Touch and hold folder or document you want to erase from the list.
Tap
> Delete.
1
2
3
Tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps.
Select the Current Job tab from the display screen.
Select the job(s) you want to erase than press Delete.
If you want to erase all the jobs, press Delete All.
To erase only fax jobs on the list, select fax jobs with in the Job Type list and click
Delete.
7
Clearing fax memory
When the fax memory is full, you can erase stored fax memory. There are two
ways to erase the fax memory, follow the steps below:
Clearing fax memory by printing a fax job
Print received fax(es). Fax memory will automatically be erased.
4. Maintenance
332
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty
environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best
printing condition and use your machine longer.
Read the following precautions before cleaning the machine: any damages
due to user’s mis-handling is not covered by the warranty:
•
Turn the machine’s power off and unplug all the power cords.
•
Do not disassemble the machine without following the instructions in this
guide.
•
Do not clean the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts
of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances. They can discolor or distort
the cabinet.
•
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean the toner dust, we recommend you
use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows into the air and might be harmful to you.
•
When using a dampened cloth, be careful not to drip any water into the
machine: it might cause an electric shock.
•
For more safety issues, refer to the safety information chapter in the User’s
Guide.
8
Cleaning the outside or the display screen
Clean the machine cabinet or the display screen with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip
onto or into the machine.
9
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate
inside the machine. These accumulations can cause print quality problems, such
as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces printing quality problems.
4. Maintenance
333
Cleaning the machine
Toner cartridge area
4
1
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine
to cool down.
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
Reinsert the toner cartridges. Hold the toner cartridge and align it with
the corresponding slot inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until
it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
1
1
2
2
5
Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
3
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the
toner cartridge area.
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the
transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene
or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage
to the machine.
4. Maintenance
334
Cleaning the machine
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
6
2
Remove the waste toner container.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
Cleaning the imaging unit area
1
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
3
Pull the corresponding imaging units out from the machine.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
1
3
1
4
2
2
• To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for more
than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green surface underside of the imaging unit.
4. Maintenance
335
Cleaning the machine
4
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the
imaging unit area.
5
Reinsert the imaging units. Labels inside the machine identify each
imaging unit’s position. Hold the handles on the new imaging unit and
push the imaging unit until it locks into place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
6
Take out the LSU window cleaning stick (X422x/X425x/X430x/X40x
series only).
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
4
2
2
1
1
3
4. Maintenance
336
Cleaning the machine
7
Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window
cleaning stick. Slowly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5
times to clean the LSU window (X422x/X425x/X430x/X40x seriesonly).
9
Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
10
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
8
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Insert LSU window cleaning stick back into its place (X422x/X425x/
X430x/X40x series only).
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
4. Maintenance
337
Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the chargers of imaging units
2
Remove the waste toner container.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
The paper dust stick and the chargers of the imaging units will need to be
cleaned after a specified number of paper is printed out. When the message that
demands you to clean the chargers of the imaging units appears, you have to
clean the paper dust stick first. Then clean the chargers. The time when the
message appears depends on environmental factors like altitude, temperature,
humidity, and so on. You need to clean the charger to maintain printing quality.
If cleaning is done, the message will disappear automatically.
Follow the cleaning procedure below.
Click this link to open an animation about cleaning the charger of imaging
units.
1
3
Pull the paper dust stick out.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
4. Maintenance
338
Cleaning the machine
4
Remove the paper dust.
6
Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
5
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Insert the paper dust stick back.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
7
Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
If the message still appears, do step 7and 8 again.
4. Maintenance
339
Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the waste toner bottle area
1
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
2
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the
waste toner container area.
4
Reinsert the waste toner container.
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Squeeze the left/right locking levers and push outward. Remove the
waste toner container.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
3
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
5
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Close the front door. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
6
Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
4. Maintenance
340
Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the LSU window
1
Take out the LSU window cleaning stick.
Open the front door.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
2
3
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Squeeze the left/right locking levers and push outward. Remove the
waste toner container.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
4. Maintenance
341
Cleaning the machine
4
Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window
cleaning stick.
5
Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
Slowly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5 times to clean
the LSU window.
6
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
X422x Series/X425x Series/X430x Series
K425x Series/K430x Series/K435x Series
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
4. Maintenance
342
Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps to ensure the best possible copy quality. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day,
as needed.
1
2
3
Prepare a soft, lint-free cloth.
Open the scanner lid.
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass
with the cloth until it is clean and dry.
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
White sheet
Document feeder glass
4
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and
dry.
5
Close the scanner lid.
4. Maintenance
343
Tips for storing the machine, supplies, and paper
•
Keep them in a cool place with no humidity.
•
Keep them covered so that dusts cannot be accumulated.
•
Keep them out of water.
10
Machine
•
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the
inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause
damage to the machine or reduce print quality.
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the
machine securely.
12
Paper
•
Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.
•
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor.
•
Do not place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packed or
unpacked.
•
Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle
or curl.
•
Keep it in a temperatures between 15°C ~30°C and humidity between 10%
~ 70%.
11
Toner cartridge/ Imaging unit
To get the best, print quality from the toner cartridge, keep the following
guidelines in mind:
•
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it’s ready to use.
•
Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.
•
Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.
•
Keep it in a stable place so the toner dust is not slanted to one side.
4. Maintenance
344
Tips for moving the machine
Use safe lifting and handling techniques. If you need to move this machine,
you need at least four people. Use the lifting handles, as shown below. If less
than four people attempt to lift the machine, it can lead to back injury.
• When moving the machine, do not subject the control panel to hard
impacts as this may damage the screen or border of the control panel.
• The warranty does not cover damage from falls or impacts due to the
intentional or unintentional actions of the user.
•
Do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may
be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad
print quality.
•
Make sure at least four people are holding the machine securely.
•
Lock the scanner lock.
•
Moving long distances using a truck:
•
-
Remove the finisher, optional trays, or desk and inner imaging units and
toner cartridges.
-
Fasten the scanner locking screw and the 3 finisher locking screws.
-
Tape trays and DSDF cover.
Moving short distances (e.g. moving between floors) to prevent
damage from vibration:
-
Remove the finisher.
4. Maintenance
345
Printing a demo page
Print a demo page to check the print quality of the machine if you have not used
the machine for sometime.
13
From the machine
See "Report" on page 298.
14
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
See "Information tab" on page 160.
4. Maintenance
346
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region
ALGERIA
ANGOLA
ARGENTINE
ARMENIA
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
AZERBAIJAN
Customer Care Center
3004 (Toll Free)
BELARUS
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-555-SAM(7267)
www.samsung.com/ar
BOSNIA
0-800-05-555
www.samsung.com/
support
BOTSWANA
1300 362 603
www.samsung.com/
au/support
0800-SAMSUNG (08007267864)[Only for Premium HA]
0800-366661[Only for Dealers]
0810-112233
www.samsung.com/
at/support
0-88-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/
support
BURUNDI
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
CAMEROON
BRAZIL
BULGARIA
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0961-2300300
0800-0300300 (Toll free)
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
in/support
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support (French)
800-10-7260
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
055 233 999
www.samsung.com/
support
8007260000
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e
regiões)
www.samsung.com/
br/support
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
centros)
0800 111 31 , Безплатна
телефонна линия
www.samsung.com/
bg/support
200
www.samsung.com/
support
7095- 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
ca/support(English)
CANADA
CHILE
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
be/support (Dutch)
BELGIUM
917 267 864
BAHRAIN
Customer Care Center
02-201-24-18
BOLIVIA
8000-GSAM (8000-4726)
BANGLADESH
WebSite
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
ca_fr/support (French)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
347
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
CHINA
COLOMBIA
Customer Care Center
400-810-5858
www.samsung.com/
cn/support
Bogotá en el 600 12 72Sin costo
en todo el pais 01 8000 112 112Y
desde tu celular #726
www.samsung.com/
co
00-800-1-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
COSTA RICA
CROATIA
Cote D’ Ivoire
CYPRUS
CZECH
DENMARK
DOMINICAN
REPUBLIC
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
Country/Region
DRC
Customer Care Center
499999
www.samsung.com/
support
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
ECUADOR
EGYPT
EIRE
072 726 786
www.samsung.com/
hr/support
8000 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
8009 4000 only from landline, toll
free
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
www.samsung.com/
cz/support
70 70 19 70
www.samsung.com/
dk/support
ESTONIA
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
FINLAND
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
08000-7267864
www.samsung.com/
eg/support
16580
0818 717100
www.samsung.com/
ie/support
8000-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
EL SALVADOR
FRANCE
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
ee/support
030-6227 515
www.samsung.com/fi/
support
01 48 63 00 00
www.samsung.com/
fr/support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
348
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 7267864*
GERMANY
WebSite
Country/Region
800-2791-9111
www.samsung.com/
de/support
(*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt.
Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk
max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
Customer Care Center
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
HONDURAS
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw.
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
3698 4698
www.samsung.com/
hk/support (Chinese)
0180 6 67267864*
HONG KONG
(*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt.
Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk
max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
GEORGIA
GHANA
GREECE
0-800-555-555
0800-10077
0302-200077
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
1-800-299-0033
GUATEMALA
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/support
(English)
HUNGARY
0680SAMSUNG (0680-726786)0680PREMIUM (0680-773648)
www.samsung.com/
hu/support
INDIA
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free1800
266 8282 - Toll Free
www.samsung.com/
in/support
021-56997777
www.samsung.com/
id/support
INDONESIA
IRAN
ITALIA
08001128888
021-8255 [CE]
021-42132 [HHP]
800-SAMSUNG (800.7267864)
www.samsung.com/
it/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
0120-363-905
www.samsung.com/
jp/support
JAMAICA
JAPAN
www.samsung.com/
iran/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
349
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
JORDAN
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
Customer Care Center
0800-22273
LATVIA
LEBANON
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
MACAU
MACEDONIA
MAURITIUS
06 5777444
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:
7799, VIP care 7700)
www.samsung.com/
kz_ru/support
MEXICO
0800 545 545
www.samsung.com/
support
MOLDOVA
183-CALL (183-2255)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
MONGOLIA
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
MONTENEGRO
00-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 9977)
www.samsung.com/
support
MOROCCO
8000-7267
www.samsung.com/
lv/support
MOZAMBIQUE
961 1484 999
www.samsung.com/
Levant
MYANMAR
8-800-77777
www.samsung.com/
lt/support
NAMIBIA
261 03 710
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support
NIGERIA
0800 333
www.samsung.com/
support
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
023 207 777
1800-88-9999
MALAYSIA
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
Levant
KUWAIT
KYRGYZSTAN
WebSite
603-77137477 (Overseas
contact)
www.samsung.com/
my/support
Customer Care Center
WebSite
800 2550
www.samsung.com/
support
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
mx/support
0-800-614-40
www.samsung.com/
support
+7-495-363-17-00
www.samsung.com/
support
020 405 888
www.samsung.com/
support
080 100 22 55
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
847267864 / 827267864
www.samsung.com/
support
+95-01-2399-888
www.samsung.com/
support
08 197 267 864
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-726-7864
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
(€ 0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com/
nl/support
0800 726 786
www.samsung.com/
nz/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
350
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
001-800-5077267
NICARAGUA
NORWAY
815 56480
OMAN
PARAGUAY
PERU
PHILIPPINES
www.samsung.com/
pk/support
800-0101
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/ar
0800-777-08
www.samsung.com/
pe/support
www.samsung.com/
ph/support
1-800-8-726-7864 [ Globe
Landline and Mobile ]
801-172-678* lub +48 22 607-93- www.samsung.com/
33*
pl/support
POLAND
Dedykowana infolinia do obsługi
zapytań dotyczących telefonów
komórkowych: 801-672-678* lub
+48 22 607-93-33*
* (koszt połączenia według taryfy
operatora)
PORTUGAL
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
0800-11-SAMS(7267)
WebSite
02- 422-2111 [ Standard Landline
]
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
0800-Samsung (72678)
Customer Care Center
1-800-10-726-7864 [ PLDT Toll
Free ]
www.samsung.com/
no/support
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
PANAMA
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-SAMSUNG (800 - 726 7864)
PAKISTAN
WebSite
808 20 7267
www.samsung.com/
pt/support
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
PUERTO RICO
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-CALL (800-2255)
QATAR
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
351
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
REUNION
RWANDA
Customer Care Center
RUSSIA
www.samsung.com/
support
SRI LANKA
9999
www.samsung.com/
support
SUDAN
www.samsung.com/
ro/support
SWEDEN
08008-726-78-64 (08008SAMSUNG) Apel GRATUIT
8-800-555-55-55 (VIP care 8-800555-55-88)
www.samsung.com/
ru/support
800 247 3457 (800 24/7 HELP)
www.samsung.com/
sa/home
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
SERBIA
SINGAPORE
SLOVENIA
SLOVAKIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
Country/Region
0262 50 88 80
*8000 (apel in retea)
ROMANIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
sa_en
800-00-0077
011 321 6899
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
www.samsung.com/
rs/support
www.samsung.com/
sg/support
080 697 267 (brezplačna številka) www.samsung.com/si
0800 - SAMSUNG
(0800-726 786)
SWITZERLAND
SYRIA
TAJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
TANZANIA
THAILAND
www.samsung.com/
sk/support
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
support
0034902172678[HHP]
0034902167267
www.samsung.com/
es/support
Customer Care Center
0117540540
www.samsung.com/
support
0115900000
1969
www.samsung.com/
support
0771 726 7864 (0771-SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com/
se/support
0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/
ch/support (German)
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/support (French)
18252273
www.samsung.com/
Levant
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-329999
www.samsung.com/
tw/support
0800 755 755
www.samsung.com/
support
0685 889 900
0-2689-3232,
www.samsung.com/
th/support
1800-29-3232
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
352
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
TURKEY
TUNISIA
Customer Care Center
U.S.A
Country/Region
444 77 11
www.samsung.com/
tr/support
VENEZUELA
80-1000-12 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
VIETNAM
800-SAMSUNG (800 -726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
ZAMBIA
U.A.E
UK
WebSite
Customer Care Center
WebSite
0-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
ve/support
1800 588 889
www.samsung.com/
vn/support
0211 350370
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/
uk/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
0800 300 300
www.samsung.com/
support
0-800-502-000
www.samsung.com/
ua/support (Ukrainian)
-Consumer
Electonics
U.S.A
-(Mobile Phones)
UGANDA
UKRAINE
URUGUAY
UZBEKISTAN
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru/support
(Russian)
0800-SAMS(7267)
www.samsung.com/ar
00-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799)
www.samsung.com/
support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
353
Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
Glossary
354
Glossary
BOOTP
Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
Collation
DADF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
Glossary
355
Glossary
DHCP
DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DIMM
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
DRPD
Duplex
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
DNS
DSDF
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
A Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on
both sides of the paper.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
Glossary
356
Glossary
Duty Cycle
Ethernet
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
ECM
EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple
in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation
FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Glossary
357
Glossary
Fuser Unit
Mass storage device (HDD)
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Mass storage device (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is
a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
Glossary
358
Glossary
IP address
ISO
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
IPM
ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
Glossary
359
Glossary
JPEG
MFP
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
LDAP
MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
Glossary
360
Glossary
MR
Originals
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
PABX
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced priately since it gets worn from contact
with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
Glossary
361
Glossary
PDF
PRN file
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
PSTN
Print Media
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
Glossary
362
Glossary
Resolution
Subnet Mask
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
SMB
TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
SMTP
TCR
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
SSID
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
TIFF
Glossary
363
Glossary
Toner Cartridge
USB
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Macintosh operating systems.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
URL
WIA
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
Glossary
364
Glossary
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based deviceindependent document format.
Glossary
365
Index
A
authority
accessories
B
installing
243
ordering
240
accounting
163
address book
161
group
161
inividual
161
adjusting
altitude
284, 289
AirPrint
324
alerts
161
altitude adjustment
284, 289
setting
163
161
copying
103, 116
basic copying
booklet printing
73
understanding the copy
booklets
73
screen
94, 108, 125, 142
customer support
C
certificate
163
checking stored document
332
D
default paper selection
printing
cleaning
imaging unit area
335
imaging unit charger
338
inside
333
LSU window
341
305
295
default settings
setting a fax header
133
deleting
address book
146
answering machine/fax
136
outside
333
demo page
346
AnyWeb Print
166
scan unit
343
device options
243
application
296
toner area
334
direct printing utility
80
enable/disable
297
waste toner bottle area
340
installing
296
display screen
20
cleaning a machine
333
managing
296
displaying
connect
uninstalling
297
viewing
296
292
authentication
login
159, 283
IP address
310
21
divice options
85
control panel
20
document box
convention
11
printer cable
copy
understanding the document box
screen
180
Index 366
Index
document feeder
43
driver installation
Unix
prefix dial
139
sending
133
315
printing
140
setting the fax header
133
320
secure receive
140
toll save
duplex printing
print
74
easy document creator
e-book conversion
118, 168
168
139, 140
fax receiving
changing the receive mode
E
features
251
print media feature
254
62
in answering machine/fax
136, 138
secure receiving
137, 138
IPv6
163
137
MAC
163
network
314
using an extension telephone
filtering
fax sending
editing
machine features
printer driver
136
6
163
group address
146
delay sending
135
firmware
individual address
145
resending automatically
135
front view 1
17
error correction mode
139
sending a fax
133
front view 2
18
error message
212
ethernet
309
144
G
extension telephone
134, 137
164
fax, email
individual address
faxing
general icons
11
changing receiving mode
136
general settings
delaying a fax transmission
135
glossary
354
F
forwarding
138
google cloud printing
325
favorites settings, for printing
preparing to fax
122
receiving
136
receiving a fax in memory
138
receiving in Ans/Fax mode
136
receiving in Tel mode
136
external authentication server
163
71
fax
address book
161
clearing stored documents
332
forward
140
284, 285, 290, 298
group
group address
145
Index 367
Index
H
Linux
HTTP settings
common Linux problems
162
connected
inner view
IPP settings
105
18, 19
162
clearing paper
198
tips for avoiding paper jams
197
JPEG
144, 149
understanding the keyboard
35
119
system requirements
258
119
printing
90
machine detail
304
scanning
120
machine protocols
313
system requirements
258
Macintosh
120
printing
maintenance parts
in the document feeder
43
originals on the scanner glass
42
address book
paper in multi-purpose tray
51
application
paper in the tray1
46
user
special media
54
login
keyboard
scanning
mac scanning
log
K
LPR/LPD settings
164
159, 283
162
L
LED
Mac
managing USB memory
understanding the status LED
link
24, 26
24
164
232
driver installation for network
connected
319
242
161
164, 296
163
248
margin
printing
295
memory
moving
common Mac problems
88
managing
clearing memory
M
machine status
40
90
loading
jam
USB scanning memory device
320
connected
printer properties
linux scanning
J
233
driver installation for network
I
id copy
driver reinstallation for USB cable
332
345
multi-purpose tray
loading
51
tips on using
51
using special media
54
Index 368
Index
N
overlay printing
network
authentication
driver installation
Linux
Mac
UNIX
Windows
installing environment
setting up
network filtering
292
320
319
320
315
260, 307
307
314
create
78
delete
79
print
79
Macintosh
88
Windows
72
O
loading paper
ordering
46
240
original document
clearing jam
loading
in the document feeder
on the scanner glass
191
43
42
Linux
90
printer properties
65
printer status
paper size
59
paper type
59
poster, print
72
postScript driver
troubleshooting
general information
172
printing
changing the default print settings
82
changing the print percentage
75
161, 295
234
duplex
287
fitting your document to a selected paper
size
75
mobile OS
323
Linux
90
mobileprint
323
Macintosh
88
print
margin
print media
optional tray
printer preferences
opening printer preferences
P
power save
N-up printing
54
special media
card stock
57
envelope
55
glossy
58
guidelines
45
labels
56
letterhead/preprinted paper
57
output support
paper tab in printer preferences
254
67
161, 295
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Macintosh
Windows
88
72
network printing
312
paper orientation
161, 295
poster
72
printing a document
Windows
63
Index 369
Index
R
printing on both sides of paper
Macintosh
Windows
89
74
printing to a file
87
UNIX
using direct printing utility
using overlay
using watermarks
Raw TCP/IP settings
rear view
19
91
regulatiory information
261
80
report
298
78
demo page
76
requirements
SyncThruTM Web Service
printing a document
Linux
90
Macintosh
88
UNIX
91
problem
operating system problems
162
231
problems
298
158
information
12
symbols
12
119
TWAIN
117
searching
address book
146
security
system
162
security settings
user authentication
292
331
server settings
306
347
174
service contact numbers
172
settings
paper feeding problems
220
scan
power problems
219
printing quality problems
224
scanner
touch screen
220
glass
42
loading documents
42
email server
162
scanner glass
loading documents
scanning
42
134
serial number
samsung printer experience
Samsung Printer Status
104
Mac
extension telephone
safety
228
quick copy
120
sending
S
copying problems
Q
Linux scanning
copy
161
current
160
DNS
310
ethernet
309
fax
161
gernal
284, 285, 290, 298
HTTP
162
machine
161
margin
161, 295
Index 370
Index
network
162, 306, 309
monitoring the supplies life
328
user profile
164
what is
158
printer
161
ordering
237
scan
162
storing
344
security
network
system
162
163
162
server
306
server for printing
312
sound
286
accounting
163
redistributing toner
184, 330
SyncThruTM Web Service
162
address book tab
161
replacing toner
186, 330
TCP/IPv4
309
application management
164
sending a toner notification
tray
285
configuring
162
WINS
310
connecting to
158
sound
286
external authentication server
163
specifications
251
fax
161
general
251
information tab
print media
254
log
164
auto continue
332
maintenance tab
164
loading paper in multi-purpose tray
requirements
158
ordering an optional tray
paper substitution
stored documents
storing
SyncThru Web Service
copy
161
TCP/IPv4
309
network
162
TCP/IPv6
310, 311
printer
161
terminology
158
toner cartridge
SyncThruTM Web Service
160, 161
machine
344
scan
162
paper
344
security tab
162
344
settings
160
settings tab
161
user access control
163
supplies
supplies
available supplies
237
T
281
329
toner unit
sending the toner reorder notification 329
touch screen
problem solving
220
tray
Tray 1
59, 60
51
240
59
59
tray setting
285
TWAIN, scan
117
Index 371
Index
U
W
UNIX
waste toner container
driver installation for network
connected
printing
replacing waste toner container
320
watermark
91
create
77
delete
77
edit
77
print
76
Unix
system requirements
259
usage
counter
32
Windows
common Windows problems
usb
understanding the usb screen
189
246
driver installation for network
connected
USB cable
231
driver installation
36
driver installation for USB cable
driver reinstallation
40
connected
315
36
driver reinstallation for USB cable
USB Drive
how to manage
248
connected
39
printing
247
printing
61
scanning
107
system requirements
257
user
managing
163
profile
164
user access control
using help
WSD settings
162
163
71, 89
Index 372
Download PDF

advertising